Home

Volume 1, Reference Information

1. Centrex Central Exchange a business telephone system where the equipment is at the CO instead of at the customer site Contrast with CPE Child mailboxes Mailboxes assigned to distribution lists of parent mailboxes Child mailboxes can give information to users and callers or can connect users and callers to other extensions and allow them to make messages co Central Office of a telephone company Confidential message A message that cannot be Given to another user Console See server maintenance console Console user When FPSA is activated persons who have access to the Change Password option in the FPSA Menu and to all options in any combination of other menus except the network configuration menus This classification is the most restricted level of access CPE Customer Premise Equipment equipment at customer s site cso NP CSO an optional feature that allows the server to continue operation when individual modules or assemblies experience hardware or software failures Cut through paging An optional feature that allows a caller to page a user by entering a telephone number on the keypad The telephone number will then be displayed on the user s pager Day and night programming A feature of the NuPoint Voice application that sets the work schedule and handles certain situations such as a user wishing to speak to an Attendant DDD Direct Distance Dialing telephone calls placed over the public telephone network
2. Default The value a NuPoint Voice parameter takes if not specifically changed by the Administrator Dial by Name A NuPoint Voice application capability that allows someone to leave a message for a user without knowing the mailbox number Instead the caller can enter the user s name on the keypad Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 200 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Dialing plan A numerical structure of how mailbox numbers are assigned and their length Also used to determine which digit implements a capability such as call placement Dial string Group of alphanumeric characters dialed or outdialed by the server Often used to facilitate call transfers Outdialing is used in the Pager application DID Direct Inward Dialing routes outside calls to a specific station without operator or attendant assistance DID line Direct Inward Dial Line a trunk line that accepts incoming calls only You cannot use this line to make outcalls or transfers If you try to make an outcall or transfer a call you will not get a dial tone This trunk line uses E amp M signaling and requires special trunk circuits from the telephone company and interfacing circuitry for the server DID NuPoint Voice application A NuPoint Voice application that handles DID lines DIL Direct In Line an outside caller can reach a specific extension by dialing the seven digit telephone number The caller does not go th
3. Sf ae ee pe er eee a ee eee Message Waiting 2 0 None Message Waiting 3 0 None List Rights Review Change F9 Cancel F10 Exit and Save Home End Menu Selection Figure 6 3 Distribution List Rights Screen MAILBOX MAINTENANCE Mailbox 00000003553 Code IName mat Classes of S Distribution List Review Rights Limits DDe 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 a Features UUN Ol T I TF Lf 1 a2 1 L L r 1 L Group DDe 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Network DDe 1 1 2 fa a ri ri tot a i 2 L Bad Login Co 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 NEVER Access Code 1 L TT o bh 1E 2 tf 2h a a Greets 24 Password 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Day Treatmen Pods beL ILT TTI T TI Extension 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 Atten DN 1 L I 2 T 11 1L P T r 1 T 1 L 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 TimeZone 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pager 96 97 98 99 None T L 2 it None Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Mailbox Maintenance Mailbox maintenance allows you to e Search for mailboxes meeting specified configuration criteria Search for Mailboxes option e Obtain configuration information about a specific mailbox Inquire About Mailboxes option e Obtain configuration information about every mai
4. Under the same circumstances receiving a sequence of 3276 results in mailbox number 176 a 3280 is converted to mailbox number 180 and so on Example 2 Assume Digits expected 2 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 31 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Digits absorbed 0 Offset 200 This means that any set of two digits received on DID maps as follows 17 digits received on DID 17 do not absorb any digits 200 add signed offset 217 mailbox number Notice that given the DID parameters in example 2 only mailbox numbers 200 through 299 can be accessed from this DID trunk Example 3 This example illustrates a situation where the offset plus the dialed number leads to digit carrying Assume Digits expected 4 Digits absorbed 0 Offset 250 This means that any set of four digits received on DID will map as follows 1587 digits received on DID 1587 do not absorb any digits 250 add signed offset 1837 mailbox number Note DID NuPoint Voice uses normal addition adding 1587 and 250 to get 1837 Applications using no carry math such as Enhanced Inband add each digit separately discarding any carried digits Day and Night Hours Parameters that establish day and night hours and work days versus weekend days operate in the DID NuPoint Voice application the same as in the NuPoint Voice application See the NuPoint Voice Application chapter for more informati
5. When a message is left in a mailbox that uses this type of message waiting the server takes a line card port off hook dials a string of DTMF digits then goes on hook The PBX translates these digits and turns the appropriate indicator on When all unplayed messages have been played the server follows the same procedure dialing a different string of digits to turn the indicator off You need to set up a line group of at least one line which is dedicated to outdialing DTMF to PBX message waiting signals DTMF to PBX Message Lights Worksheet Configuring these message indicators involves two steps setting up a line group of at least one line to serve as an outdialer of message indicators requests and configuring the dial strings that constitute these requests Complete the worksheet Figure 5 1 then see Message Waiting Indicators in the task list for configuration procedures Configuring the PBX Assign to each server line that is dedicated to this application a PBX class of service that permits the server to turn message waiting indicators on and off Configuring the Application There are three steps to configuring DTMF to PBX message indicators Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 67 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 1 Determine what DTMF strings the PBX uses to turn message waiting indicators on and off and use this information to complete the DTMF to PBX Message Lights Worksheet A b
6. s identity within the server Each user ID is associated with one real name though one real name can be assigned multiple user IDs During the login sequence you are identified by your user ID the terminal device and the module where you logged in Each subsequent activity you perform during a session at a server maintenance console can be recorded in the audit trail see Security Reports and Audit Trails later in this chapter for more information on the audit trail The server superuser can display all current user IDs along with the name password permission categories and other statistics associated with them at a server maintenance console see List of Authorized Users in the Reports chapter A user ID can be up to 17 characters The server superuser s ID root cannot be changed Password A user ID can be verified by entering an optional password The same password can be used with different user IDs The server superuser and console users each have their own password A password must meet the following requirements e Its length is six to 30 alphanumeric characters but only the first 8 are used e It cannot contain a substring of the user ID that is four or more characters For example a user ID of mark61 cannot have the password markey4 or n ark60 because each contains substrings that are part of the user ID indicated in bold e When you change your password the new one cannot be the same as the old When
7. Application in the task list for procedures on recording a site tutorial Volume 2 of this manual e When outside callers access the message center they are prompted to Please enter a mailbox number or wait after the company greeting is played Callers who wait because they have rotary dial phones or do not know the correct mailbox number for example are then prompted Please leave your name the name of the person you are calling anda message These unaddressed messages go into the attendant s mailbox Multiple Attendant s Mailboxes If a large number of unaddressed messages is expected up to five Attendant s Mailboxes may be configured by entering the mailbox numbers separated by commas for example 999 910 911 912 913 The message of the day and the site tutorial can be made only from the first attendant s mailbox that is configured the other mailboxes are used only for storing unaddressed messages When the first mailbox is full NuPoint Voice begins using the second mailbox until it is full and so on until all attendant s mailboxes are full You can configure any mailbox as the attendant s mailbox by entering the mailbox number in this field If you select a mailbox number other than one of the defaults you must create the mailbox before it can be used See Mailboxes in the task list Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 24 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release
8. Enter Number of hours from 1 through 8760 1 year O for no limit a period to prevent automatic purging Default 672 hours 28 days Unplayed Fax Message Retention Sets how long an unplayed fax can remain in a mailbox before it is deleted by automatic purging Requires the NuPoint Fax optional feature Enter Number of hours from 1 through 8760 1 year 0 for no limit a period to prevent automatic purging copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 120 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Default 336 hours 14 days Urgent Fax Message Retention Sets how long an urgent fax can remain in a mailbox before it is deleted by automatic purging Requires the NuPoint Fax optional feature Enter Number of hours from 0 through 8760 1 year O for no limit a period to prevent automatic purging Default 336 hours 14 days Fax Receipt Retention Sets how long a receipt for a fax can remain in a mailbox before it is deleted by automatic purging Requires the NuPoint Fax optional feature Enter Number of hours from 0 through 8760 1 year O for no limit a period to prevent automatic purging Default 672 hours 28 days Absolute Message Retention Sets how long a message stays in the mailbox if the user does not delete it If you set this to less than the values for the Played and Unplayed message retention parameters it overrides them If this is set to O the default it is
9. MAILBOX 3550 ID Miller Andrea CODE g amp a GROUP GCOS 1 229 44 FCOS 61 VIP no urgent base rate 465 41 1041 20 disk usage 44 34 6 of network nodes sent urgent to 0 17 17 90 of network nodes 1 mins sent to 0 03 0 43 of network nodes 1 mins sent urgent 0 21 21 21 of remote network recipients 1 mins sent 247 96 0 43 of remote network recipients 1 mins sent urgent 529 46 12 fax messages made 0 01 15 fax message retrievals non billed 0 04 3 fax message retrieval failures 0 00 0 67 fax disk usage 1375 64 34 fax pages made Total Charges 2892 71 The Termination Report can be done only for one mailbox at a time The Termination Report uses the same billing rates as the Billing Report but the server allows you to enter a new base rate in order to prorate charges over the length of time that the mailbox was n use For example if the base rate is 10 00 per month and the mailbox was in use for 15 days you can change the base rate to 5 00 The Termination Report gathers data from the mailbox but it does not create a previous billing data file nor does it update the billing counters Thus you can use this report to simply interrogate the status of a mailbox To zero the billing counters delete the mailbox then create it again Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 182 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 If there are any unplayed messages in the mailbox at the ti
10. The mailbox dialing plan is a string of nine elements The elements in the string define by position the number of digits in valid mailbox numbers The first element shows the number of digits allowed for mailboxes that begin with 1 The next element shows the number of digits allowed for mailboxes that begin with 2 and so on up to mailboxes that begin with 9 Each element is separated by commas You must reenter the entire mailbox dialing plan when you change any element Valid mailbox numbers can be up to 11 digits long so valid numeric elements can be 0 zero through 11 When an element is zero no mailboxes beginning with that digit are allowed For example if your dialing plan is 0 3 3 7 3 3 3 3 10 the NuPoint Voice application interprets the string as follows Table 2 4 Mailbox Dialing Plan Example 0 3 3 7 3 3 3 3 10 Digit Element Interpretation i 0 No mailboxes start with 1 Mailbox numbers 1 11 111 and so on are all invalid i2 3 Mailboxes starting with 2 are three digits long Mailbox numbers 2 22 2222 are invalid Mailbox numbers 222 and 246 are valid B ie Mailboxes starting with 3 are three digits long Mailbox numbers 3 33 and 3333 are invalid Mailbox number 333 is valid 4 7 Mailboxes starting with 4 are seven digits long Valid mailboxes Jare 434 1234 and 499 8765 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 16 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Relea
11. UNLIMITED I Restriction 1 Group Default GCOS 1 1 INetwork Default 1 Bad Login Count 0 Last Login Time NEVER Access Code Speech Quality Msgs 0 Greets 0 Password N Tutorial N Day Treatment M Night Treatment M Extension 998 Index 0 Atten DN Index 0 CallPlacement Index N TimeZone 0 Message Waiting 1 0 None Message Waiting 2 0 None Message Waiting 3 0 None List Rights Review Change F1 Next F2 Prior F6 Delete F8 Stats F9 or Esc Exit F10 Edit Enter mailbox number to modify or create There are additional fields to edit for the three Message Waiting Indicator Fields and for the two List Rights fields In both cases press the End key to edit the Use this screen to configure paging or message waiting Figure 6 2 shows the List Rights screen which you use when editing distribution list change or review right Figure 6 2 Message Waiting I ndicator Screen MAILBOX MAINTENANCE Mailbox Message Waiting Light Fields Name Pager 01 Pager 02 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 83 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Classes of Suppress N N Limits D Pager Num Features U Post Pager Group D System 0 0 Network D Frequency 0 0 Bad Login Interval 0 0 Access Cod Busy Frequency 0 o Password Busy Interval 0 0 Day Treatm Msg dlvr N N Extension Start Time 12 00 am 12 00 am Atten DN Stop Time 12 00 am 12 00 am Alt Page N
12. Worksheets Worksheets are supplied see Volume 2 of this manual to help you organize configuration data before you enter it at the NuPoint Messenger server maintenance console There is a worksheet for each application for different kinds of mailboxes and for FCOSs LCOSs and GCOSs Complete the worksheets for all applications that you wish to add to the configuration before you begin entering data at a server maintenance console This prevents duplication of line group assignments and gives an accurate picture of how server resources have been divided among the applications Fields of data on these worksheets are explained in the application chapters that follow Optional features are shipped with instructions similar to the worksheet format NuPoint Messenger Server Software at a Glance Figure 1 1 shows how the various parts of NuPoint Messenger server software work together It illustrates how line groups are made up of phone lines how each application is assigned one line group and how modifiers work on all applications In addition it shows how mailboxes have a number of different configuration parameters Finally it shows how Billing and Reports use all server information Figure 1 1 NuPoint Messenger Server Software Overview 2 NuPoint Voice Application This chapter covers e Overview of the NuPoint Voice application e Default software configuration e NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet e Line group definition e
13. night weekend hours for each line group on the server the greeting that an outside caller hears Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 15 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 depends on the line group used to access the mailbox Of course if you don t record any custom greetings then all callers hear the same default greeting Start Time of the Work Day This is the time for the start of the work day in the format hh mm AM or PM where hh is the hour and mm is the minute The default start time for the work day is 8 a m If neither AM nor PM is specified the server assumes that the time is AM End Time of the Work Day This is the time for the end of the work day in the format hh mm AM or PM where hh is the hour and mm is the minute The default end time for the work day is 5 p m If neither AM nor PM is specified the server assumes that the time is PM If you want to use the same greeting 24 hours a day enter 12 00AM in both Start and End time Weekend Days Table This is a table that tells the NuPoint Voice application when to treat calls that are answered during the work day interval as specified in the two entries above as day calls and when to treat these calls as night weekend calls The table starts with Monday The default value is DDDDDNN which means that the work days are Monday through Friday and the weekend days are Saturday and Sunday Mailbox Dialing Plan
14. such as other users outside callers or distribution lists Feature bits 020 through 035 control the ability to make or give messages to users and distribution lists Outdials Depending on the optional features purchased with your server mailbox owners can send a variety of outdial calls including call placement message delivery auto wakeup fax and paging To prevent abuse and to provide better call traffic you can restrict different outgoing call types to specific line groups and set appropriate restrictions and limits on each line group This prevents users from accessing other services on dedicated line groups and allows you to monitor resource usage Mailbox owners can use the message delivery feature for message waiting in which the server calls a specified number when the mailbox owner receives a new message The person who answers the phone must enter the correct passcode to access the mailbox thus ensuring that only the mailbox owner can listen to the message Mailbox owners can use call placement to record a message and send it to a telephone number as opposed to a mailbox The message sender can record the name of the intended recipient and can optionally require a passcode before the message is played The FCOS and LCOS settings provide a tool for the administrator to control access to outdial services Various feature bits enable use of the different features and LCOS limits control the number of digits that a mailbox ow
15. 0 Played 2 8 9 52 61 Urgent 0 Receipts 0 1 1 Undelivered 0 Future delivery 0 a 1 1 Messages 10 msg DATE TIME LENGTH SENDER PORT FLAGS MINS Played Queue 52 1867277 05 19 95 7 49 am 0 6 000000000003644 kept 05 19 95 12 05 pm 56 1801655 05 18 95 2 03 pm 1 1 000000000003553 62 2063758 05 18 95 12 05 pm 0 2 000000000003644 48 425226 05 18 95 10 29 am 0 8 000000000003553 29 425324 05 18 95 6 26 am 1 5 000000000003644 38 1932613 05 17 95 12 15 pm 2 5 O00000000000000 61 2457056 06 07 95 12 16 pm 0 2 000000000002622 2457055 0 1 from node 1 kept 06 07 95 4 08 pm 35 2129425 06 07 95 12 06 pm 0 1 000000000003685 1474042 0 1 from node 1 30 1474043 06 06 95 6 47 pm 1 7 000000000003685 2129426 0 1 from node 1 21 2063930 06 06 95 6 27 pm 0 6 000000000003603 2063929 0 1 from node 1 Total Speech and Account Breakdown Report TOTAL HEAD TAIL 1 l 1 1 I f MSG SIBL NXT PRV NXT PRV el 1 56 1 1 _ 1_ 62 52 1 1 48 56 1 1 29 62 1 1 38 48 ai el sll 2g 1 52 35 l el il 30 l 1 k 21 35 1 1 1 30 This report see sample in Figure 12 31 is one of three reports statistics on idle mailboxes and mailbox statistic totals are the other two that give you a snapshot of current mailbox usage and speech storage in summary form If you need detailed information about speech storage usage on your
16. 0 0 PASSWD N TUTOR N DAY M NIGHT M NAME CODE EXTEN 999 INDEX 0 ATTEN DN INDEX 0 ACCESS NONE NOTIFICATION Y INTERNAL INDEX 0 BILLED INDEX 0 NON BILLED INDEX 0 CALL PLACEMENT INDEX NONE TIME ZONE OFFSET 0 DISTRIBUTION LISTS WITH CHANGE RIGHTS all DISTRIBUTION LISTS WITH REVIEW RIGHTS all TOTAL Mailboxes 35 Messages 0 Unplayed 0 Minutes 0 0 Table 12 3 Mailbox Data Field Report Field Description copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 185 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 URGENT RECEIPT MAILBOX The number of the mailbox being reported MSGS The total number of played and unplayed messages in this mailbox UNPLAYED The number of unplayed messages The number of urgent messages The number of messages received ILCOS FCOS The Limits Class of Service LCOS assigned to this mailbox the LCOS name if any follows the colon and the LCOS number follows the name The Feature Class of Service FCOS assigned to this mailbox the FCOS name if any follows the colon and the FCOS number follows the name IGCOS INCOS The Group Class of Service GCOS assigned to this mailbox the GCOS name if any follows the colon and the GCOS number follows the name The Network Class of Service NCOS assigned to this mailbox the NCOS name if any follows the colon and the NCOS number follows the name TCOS IRCOS BAD LOGS Th
17. 10 possible default administrator s mailboxes It also contains 10 possible default attendant s mailboxes The defaults are ican Mailbox Defaults attendant Mailbox Defaults 98 99 998 999 9998 9999 99998 99999 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 33 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 999998 999999 9999998 9999999 99999998 99999999 999999998 999999999 9999999998 9999999999 99999999998 99999999999 See the NuPoint Voice Application chapter for more information on these two mailboxes While 0 through 11 are acceptable entries for each position in the dial plan if you wish to use one of these default mailboxes the dial plan entry for mailboxes that begin with 9 must be within the range 2 11 Mailbox Passcodes Passcode parameters operate in the DID NuPoint Voice application the same as in the NuPoint Voice application See the NuPoint Voice Application chapter for more information Default Language For Prompts The default language for prompts operates in the DID NuPoint Voice application the same as in the NuPoint Voice application See the NuPoint Voice Application chapter for more information Answer Delay You may set a variable answer delay The default for this parameter is zero no delay and in most cases it does not need not be changed A delay of up to 1 2 second may be required for certain applications for example NuPoint Voice and NP Receptionist
18. 9 a m to 5 p m and receive a call at midnight the server does not automatically call you at 9 a m and does not call you until another message arrives during the scheduled time period With this feature the server calls you at the beginning of the next scheduled message delivery start time For further information on FCOSs and feature bits see the Features Class of Service chapter Table 4 4 Feature Bits That Control Message Delivery Feature Function 070 User Options Menu 079 Set message wait 1 for urgent messages only 080 Set message wait 2 for urgent messages only 094 Enable message delivery change message delivery options 143 Change message delivery phone number 168 Message wait 1 pager requeue 169 Message wait 2 pager requeue 181 Paging over message delivery message waiting 1 over message waiting 2 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 182 Use pri alt as week weekend for message waiting type 1 1183 Use pri alt as week weekend for message waiting type 2 Changing an LCOS Definition Only one limit applies to message delivery the Message Delivery Phone Length limit It controls user modification of message delivery The message delivery phone lengths determine the maximum number of digits users can enter for a message delivery number The default is 7 the allowable range is 3 to 11 digits The limit is useful for preventing
19. ATB condition during this period for each line group Line Group Usage Report This report shows the number of seconds during which individual ports in a line group were busy and how many calls each port received over a specified reporting period The server administrator can choose to display the data for a single group or for a range of group numbers The reporting period can be any hour or range of hours from the current day or portions of the most recent seven days The server administrator can choose to run either a full report which gives the statistics in 15 minute increments for each hour of the reporting period or a summary report which shows the average line group usage for each hour Figure 12 4 shows Sample Standard Line Group Usage Report Figure 12 4 Sample Standard Line Group Usage Report LINE GROUP USAGE 15 min REPORT Fri Apr 6 1995 4 42 pm 06 06 95 15hr 16hr minutes interval Group 1 LINE 1 0 0 HOUR 14 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 10 40 200 50 300 8 CALLS 1 1 10 2 14 LINE 1 0 1 HOUR 14 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 5 100 40 70 215 6 CALLS 1 2 3 4 10 LINE 1 0 2 HOUR 14 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALLS 0 0 0 0 0 LINE 1 0 3 HOUR 14 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALLS 0 0 0 0 0 Reading the Line Group Usage Report The report heading shows
20. AVERAGE MESSAGE USAGE SUMMARY REPORT Fri Apr 21 1995 10 50 am 04 14 95 13hr 16hr Max Messages 90000 DAY HOUR FREE USED PERCENT 1 13 86512 3488 4 1 14 86518 3482 4 1 15 86489 3511 4 1 16 86472 3528 4 04 14 95 13hr 16hr Max Messages 90000 DAY HOUR FREE USED PERCENT 2 13 86210 3790 4 2 14 86189 3811 4 2 15 86271 3729 4 2 16 86227 3473 4 04 14 95 13hr 16hr Max Messages 90000 DAY HOUR FREE USED PERCENT 3 13 86138 3862 4 3 14 86096 3904 4 3 15 86062 3938 4 3 16 86015 3985 4 Reading the Message Usage Summary Report The Message Usage Summary Report see sample in Figure 12 9 displays the by day and hour the total number of messages used the total number of messages available and the percent of message storage used The summary report is much less specific than the standard report but it allows you to determine the hours at which message storage was at its peak and which hours Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 166 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 had relatively little message storage You can report the hours immediately before and after midnight to judge the effectiveness of the automatic purge If message storage is near or above 80 on a regular basis for example most mailbox LCOSs on the server should be adjusted to give these mailboxes a shorter message retention time This makes the purge more effective and frees message storage more quickly As an alternativ
21. Cut through Paging optional feature documentation Message delivery is a function that allows the server to notify a mailbox owner when a message has been received by calling the mailbox owner at a predefined telephone number and allowing the owner to log into the mailbox Parameters can be set to limit the hours that a message delivery may be made or the types of messages that activate the message delivery Call placement is similar to message delivery in that it places a call to a telephone number In this case the message is made by rather than to the mailbox owner The message is addressed to a telephone number rather than to a mailbox The answering party does not have to log in to hear the message Call placement was formerly known as off system messaging Procedures You can perform the following procedures with the Pager application These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number Call Placement Enable Call Placement CP 3306 Test Call Placement CP 3362 Message Delivery Configuration Message Delivery Configuration CP 3337 Allow Mailbox Owners to Control Message Delivery CP 3339 Allow Receipt of Urgent Pages or Urgent Message Delivery Only CP 3344 Configure a Mailbox For Message Delivery CP 5018 Define a Pager System for Message Delivery CP 5013 Set Limits for Message Delivery CP 3338 Set Paging or Message Delivery Schedules and Intervals CP 3321 Test Message Delivery CP 3361 Turn All Pagers or Mes
22. GCOS can communicate with each other but cannot communicate with anyone else Affinity group GCOSs are never defined in the system you simply assign one numbered from 65 through 32 000 to mailboxes The example in Figure 8 4 shows how affinity groups can create several communication groups within a single system Figure 8 4 Grouping Scheme Using Affinity Group GCOSs Guidelines for Deciding Which Type of GCOS to use When deciding which type of GCOS to use consider the following factors e Ifyou want all mailboxes to be able to exchange messages just assign to them GCOS 1 a bitmapped GCOS which contains all 128 groups e You can mix the two GCOS types but mailboxes with bitmapped GCOSs numbered 1 64 cannot interact with mailboxes that have affinity group GCOSs numbered 65 32000 and no single mailbox can communicate with all the mailboxes If you assign the bitmapped GCOS 1 to one mailbox and the affinity GCOS 65 to another those mailboxes cannot exchange messages e With bitmapped GCOSs every mailbox that shares the same group can exchange messages even if the shared group is in different bitmapped GCOSs copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 123 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Bitmapped GCOSs are useful when you need to develop complex relationships The communication links required for the arrangement shown in Figure 8 3 for example are possible only with a bitmapped GCOS Di
23. Once you have completed the NuPoint Voice configuration you must activate changes create mailboxes record a company greeting and test the configuration Procedures covering these steps are listed below Procedures You can perform the following procedures with the NuPoint Voice application These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number NuPoint Voice Application Configuration CP 3301 Configure a Dialing Plan CP 5002 Configure for Transfer to a System Attendant CP 5020 Configure for Unaddressed Messages CP 3314 Configure Speech Quality for an Application CP 5053 Configure NP TDD CP 3291 Enable Multiple Messages for Outside Callers CP 5022 Enable the Dial by Name Function CP 3309 Prevent Unaddressed Messages CP 5023 Test the NuPoint Voice Application CP 5315 Default Software Configuration The NuPoint Voice application is the only application that is pre installed in the factory configuration To add capabilities and to meet the requirements of a particular site you usually must change one or more of the defaults All of the defaults can be changed at a server maintenance console The default configuration has the values shown in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 NuPoint Voice Application Defaults Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 12 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Parameter NuPoin
24. Receptionist Day Night Treatment Types RECEPTIONIST DAY NIGHT TREATMENT TYPES Fri Apr 21 17 24 10 1995 EXTENSION TYPES Auth Redial Index Name Time Auth Code Dflt RNA BUSY REJ SCREEN T treatment 1 A D R R R Y 2 treatment 2 A D R R R N 3 treatment 3 A A R R R Y 4 treatment 4 A M R R R Y 5 treatment 5 A M M M R N 6 treatment 6 A M M M M Y 7 treatment 7 A R M R M Y 8 treatment 8 A R R R M Y 9 treatment 9 A R R R R N 10 treatment 10 A M A A Y TRUNK TYPES Auth Redial Index Name Time Auth Code Dflt Connect Fail The sample report shows 11 treatment types nine Extension and two Trunk treatment types Read the report line by line from left to right and refer to Table 12 4 for field descriptions Table 12 4__ Fields in Day Night Treatment Report Field Description EXTENSION TYPES _ The treatment types that follow are extension treatment types Index The Index number that represents each treatment type Name A descriptive name that identifies each treatment type Auth Time The authorized time period s during which this number may be laccessed A all D day N night Table 12 4 Fields in Day Night Authorization Time Field Description EXTENSION TYPES The treatment types that follow are extension treatment types Index The Index number that represents each treatment type Name A descriptive name that identifies each treatment type Auth Time The authorized time period s during which this
25. Run an Audit Trail Report CP 3346 Set the Site Name Site Banner and Site Code CP 5415 Start or Stop an Audit Trail CP 4340 View a List of Current Users CP 4341 Protection From Outside Abuse Mailboxes that can be reached through the telephone network are seen as the primary entry point for hostile invasion of a communications server such as the NuPoint Messenger server Service providers and corporate telecommunications managers alike are concerned about hackers taking over mailboxes for their own applications or using mailboxes for toll fraud by calling through long distance facilities accessible from the server You can configure your server to require access codes or passcodes before callers can reach various functions and you can configure mailboxes to automatically perform certain functions such as hanging up after playing a greeting Existing Mailboxes The first level of security is protection of the mailboxes by passcodes By default the server requires passcodes on all mailboxes You can turn this feature off using feature bit 218 for direct calls but you should do so with caution Mailbox owner passcodes can be up to 10 digits in length and users can change their passcodes at any time feature bit 073 The server administrator typically sets a temporary passcode for new mailboxes but the user is forced to enter a permanent passcode during the interactive tutorial Using FCOS settings you can prevent users from settin
26. TDD greeting and leave a message for the mailbox owner Standard user options such as reviewing and recording over a message making a message urgent appending to a message and dialing an extension are also allowed Configuring NP TDD You can configure NP TDD to apply to either an entire line group or specific mailboxes To configure NP TDD make the following changes e Set the default language for prompts to TDD in the NuPoint Voice application if configuring the line group e Assign an NP TDD LCOS or another LCOS specifying NP TDD as the prompts language to any mailboxes using NP TDD This LCOS should also have the Greeting Length and User Name Length limits parameters appropriately set for NP TDD e Change the Stop Record Timeout and Dial Tone Detect Time telephony parameters phoneline exceptions for the line group in which NP TDD is configured Refer to the Task List Volume 2 of this manual for specific instructions on configuring NP TDD For more information configuring NP TDD refer to WP TDD Configuration Note 14 Effect of NP TDD on Other Server Features Certain NuPoint Messenger server features and user options are not available to any mailbox associated with the line group in which NP TDD is configured These features are e NP WakeUp optional feature e Call scheduling for pages e Future delivery e Standard tutorial Answer Delay You may set a variable answer delay with the Delay Before Answer parameter The d
27. abbreviated form of the current menu called the short menu To view the complete current menu when a short menu is displayed press Enter e To return to the Main Menu from any NuPoint Voice configuration menu press X Exit until the Main Menu appears Accepting Defaults e To accept a default displayed in a prompt just press Enter e To accept a default displayed in a menu no action is necessary Quitting an Entry Session You can quit at any point during entry of offline or online parameters and Class of Service menus Quitting discards all entries you have made and leaves the NuPoint Voice configuration the way it was before you started entering parameters To quit from the NuPoint Voice Configuration Offline or Online menu Select Q Quit Forget Changes Prompt Quit and Forget changes y n Response Y to return to the NuPoint Voice Configuration Main Menu Shortcut Commands You can use the Ctrl Control key or the slash key while simultaneously pressing another key to execute shortcut commands at a system maintenance console To do this T Activate a timed out console any key Exit from the offline or online menus or FCOS LCOS GCOS x menus and save any entries Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Exit from the offline or online menus or FCOS LCOS GCOS Q Y menus without saving any entries Stop scrolling
28. about Msgs Total played unplayed and urgent messages in the mailbox Unp Unplayed messages Urg Urgent messages Rec Receipts requested and forced Mins Length of all messages in tenths of a minute FCOS Classes of Service assigned to the mailbox LCOS GCOS NCOS MWI Message waiting type assigned to this mailbox Passwd Digits means there is a temporary passcode for this mailbox and the mailbox owner has not yet logged into it T means that the tutorial for a new mailbox owner has been activated Y or N means there is or is not a passcode for this mailbox and that the mailbox owner has logged into the mailbox Mailbox Block Inquiry Report The Mailbox Block Inquiry Report see sample in Figure 12 30 is the same report as the Mailbox Blocked Report described earlier under Billing Reports It is available through the Mailbox Maintenance Menu while the Mailbox Blocked Report is available through the Billing Menu Figure 12 30 Sample Mailbox Block I nquiry Report MAILBOX 3553 Login status Version 600A03 Bad logs Last log 06 13 95 12 01 pm Configuration Name 2129233 Greetingl 1867011 Greeting2 1604963 Greeting3 622340 Greeting4 2260310 Alt greetl p Alt greet2 p Alt greet3 p Alt greet4 p Fax Cov Grt 0 Fax Index o Default Fax 3732 Family Namel 0 Family Name2 0 Family Name3 0 Passcode XXXXXXXXXX Tutorial N Extension 3553 Ext index 0 Attendant Attend i
29. all the display data has been entered This activates the pager The dial string for these actions is Caller Action Dial String Wait for dial tone T Dial 9 to get outside access 9 Wait for second dial tone T Dial individual pager number is 12135559116 Wait four seconds for line to settle Wait for computer dial tone G Dial display data 14155556644 Enter to indicate that all the data has been entered and make paging terminal hang up When a number outside the PBX is outdialed followed by a G Greet extra characters Wait One Second should precede the G This is done because line noise during call setup of particularly noisy switching equipment could be misinterpreted as a greeting by the server In this case configuration is more involved since there is insufficient room in the mailbox Pager Number parameter to specify the individual pager number and the display data both of which are unique to this pager In most installations however DID display pagers share a common area code and prefix 1 213 555 in this case and configuring the area code and prefix into the outdial index allows more than one pager to use that pager system The organization of the dial string is Pager system dial string T9T1213555 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 58 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Pager Number 91164 4 4 G Post Pager Number 14155556644 Jane wants you
30. amount of time during which the line was busy in a single fifteen minute interval of the reporting period LOWEST USAGE The least total amount of time during which the line was busy in a single fifteen minute interval of the reporting period This was the period of slowest traffic for that line during the reporting interval Figure 12 7 Line Usage Summary Report TOTAL USAGE PER LINE SUMMARY REPORT Fri Apr 21 1995 10 37 am Hours 8 12 Days 1 5 TRIPLET SEC BUSY CALLS L320 22703 168 Lge 4069 31 14332 695 4 TIS 108 1 T50 44 1 neo eg 57 1 Reading the Line Usage Summary Report The Line Usage Summary Report see sample in Figure 12 7 displays the ports by triplet then gives the total seconds during which each line was busy and the total number of calls that each line received during the entire report period The summary report is much less specific than the standard report but it allows the server administrator to see at a glance which line received the most traffic for the specified time interval In addition by comparing the number of seconds that a Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 164 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 port was busy with the number of calls that the line received the server administrator can determine the average duration of a call during this period for each port Message Usage Report The Message Usage Report see sample in Figure 12 8 shows the number of mes
31. an extension number instead In the greeting of the tree mailbox tell callers they can press to bypass the single digit tree options Be sure to tell callers that they can press only while the greeting is playing at any other time during the call if callers press they will be disconnected The greeting should also state that callers can reach an attendant by pressing 0 Tree Mailbox Diagram Before configuring a tree mailbox complete a Mailbox Worksheet and a Tree Mailbox Diagram Each diagram entry is explained in the following paragraphs Pre programmed default values for entries are given where applicable If you want to use a default value indicate that fact on the diagram Then you will not need to select or enter any information for that parameter during reconfiguration Figure 6 12 shows a sample Tree Mailbox diagram A blank Mailbox Group Worksheet is located in Volume 2 of this manual Mailbox No Enter the number of the tree mailbox in the topmost box on the worksheet Enter the number of all mailboxes that are members of the tree mailbox s distribution list 01 child mailboxes in the remaining boxes For every mailbox number identified in the Tree Mailbox Diagram there should be a corresponding Mailbox Worksheet completed see Mailbox Worksheets later in this chapter Figure 6 12 Sample Tree Mailbox FCOS A The FCOS assigned to a child mailbox determines itsrelationship to the tree mailbox and also determi
32. any of the following conditions e The recipient mailbox does not have the appropriate bit in its FCOS to receive a broadcasted greeting or name e A remote recipient mailbox could not be reached because of network blockage e A greeting could not be copied or recorded for a mailbox local or remote for miscellaneous reasons Chain Mailbox Chain mailboxes play a greeting then route calls to the mailbox selected by the caller The chain mailbox itself cannot accept messages from users or callers Chain mailboxes are useful for routing incoming callers For example a chain mailbox greeting could say Welcome to the Acme Company Credit Department If you are calling about new home mortgages enter 100 on your pushbutton phone If you want to refinance your existing mortgage enter 110 For car and truck loans enter 120 If there is a problem with your credit report enter 130 If you wish to speak to an operator or have a rotary phone please wait The caller can then dial the appropriate mailbox number and be transferred to it Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 97 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 A mailbox owner can log into a chain mailbox and change the mailbox name greeting and passcode but cannot make messages or create or use distonbution lists Check I n Check Out Mailboxes1958 These mailboxes are used by hotels A check in mailbox is a special mailbox that manipulates oth
33. billed back to a mailbox owner s account This form of outdial billing can be implemented through individual mailboxes configuration and is explained more fully in the Mailboxes chapter Here is an example Henry Huggins has a pager and has his pager calls billed to his calling card number To perform this manually you lift the telephone receiver wait for a dial tone dial 9 to get an outside line listen for a dial tone dial 0 612 555 4534 0 indicates you will charge the call wait for a computer tone dial the calling card number wait for another tone dial his mailbox number 6446 then dial to tell the pager that all the display data has been entered This activates the pager The dial string for these actions is Caller Action Dial String Wait for dial tone T Dial 9 to get outside access 9 Wait for second dial tone T Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 63 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Dial individual pager number is 06125554534 Wait four seconds for line to settle Wait for computer tone G Dial calling card number 503102533346666 Wait four seconds for line to settle Wait for computer dial tone G Dial display data mailbox 6446 Enter to indicate that all the data has been entered and make paging terminal hang up In this case such as in Example 3 DID Display pager configuration is complex since there is insufficient room in th
34. but if the user changes offices and you must change the mailbox number you can do it from the nearest pushbutton telephone Note If your server has more than one line group and more than one administrator s mailbox you must be sure to call the line group associated with the administrator s mailbox you are using to perform Administration by Phone The Administration by Phone feature is not available to any mailboxes associated with the line group in which NP TDD is configured Procedures Use the following procedures to perform administration by phone These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number Administration by Phone CP 3401 Add a Mailbox by Phone CP 4403 Delete a Mailbox by Phone CP 4404 Modify a Mailbox by Phone CP 4405 Report System Usage Statistics by Phone CP 4409 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 131 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Set a Mailbox Passcode and Tutorial by Phone CP 4406 Set or Change Administrator s Mailbox Passcode by Phone CP 4402 Set System Date and Time by Phone CP 4407 Start a Mailbox Backup to Diskette by Phone CP 4408 Telephone Administration Timing Certain timing parameters are programmed into Administration by Phone to detect inactivity and to safeguard the server against unauthorized use These time out factors make it essential for the server administrator to be well prepared before beginning a telephone administration ses
35. by itself line triplets to report Pager System Parameters To see the index number name access code and hold time of each supported pager system you can obtain a Pager Systems Access Codes Report see sample in Figure 12 34 To see all parameters configured for supported pager systems you should obtain a System Configuration Report see sample in Figure 12 26 Figure 12 34 Sample Pager Systems Access Codes Report PAGER SYSTEMS ACCESS CODES Fri Apr 21 17 20 58 1995 INDEX PAGER NAME ACCESS CODE HOLD TIME 3 TEST DEMO t9otl1 5 4 OUTSIDE LINE tot 5 7 SKYPAGER t9t18005554244 5 8 800 PAGER 9t18005551616 9 5 11 FaxInternal t 5 15 NP View Pager 2 NP Receptionist Optional Feature When NP Receptionist is installed on your server two reports are available that show NP Receptionist configuration the Receptionist Day Night Treatment Types Report and Pre Extension Dial Strings Report copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 193 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Receptionist Day Night Treatment Types Report Each mailbox configuration contains day and night treatment types that tell the server exactly how mailbox owners wish to have their calls handled under different conditions The Receptionist Day Night Treatment Types Report see sample in Figure 12 35 displays the treatment types from which the server administrator can choose when creating mailboxes Figure 12 35 Sample
36. by using the server s random passcode generation program copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 136 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 If you have created mailboxes but have not yet assigned them to users you can use an FCOS to deny login feature bit 001 To ensure that a new mailbox once assigned is not used until the owner accesses it you can require initialization from the integrated telephone number feature bit 142 You can also set the FCOS to prevent messages from being received until the mailbox has been initialized feature bit 127 Note Feature bit 142 Must run tutorial from own phone is not supported for all integrations Line Groups By dividing the total number of ports in your server into line groups you can increase the security for specific applications You can configure each application to be on a different line group and enable an appropriate level of security for each application Separating the applications by line group can help prevent certain types of abuse such as connecting from one application to another Incoming and outgoing calls occur on separate line groups in a server This keeps hackers from reaching the server and then dialing out through the NP Receptionist or another application You can restrict access to certain line groups like a toll free dial in line group by setting the FCOS to require callers to enter an access code before hearing the regular li
37. customize the application for your server Procedures covering these steps are listed below and presented in detail in Volume 2 of this manual A third step is necessary if your CO requires wink start you need to make a phoneline exception Once you have completed the DID NuPoint Voice application configuration you need to activate changes create mailboxes and test the configuration Procedures covering these steps are listed below When configuring the DID NuPoint Voice application it helps to keep in mind the DID sequence that occurs between the server and the CO Figure 3 1 gives a general view of the progress of a typical DID call into the server Figure 3 1 Typical Steps in the DID Sequence Procedures You can perform the following procedures with the DID NuPoint Voice application These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number DID VoiceMemoConfiguration CP 3320 Set Parameters for Digit Absorption and Offset CP 6000 Test the DID NuPoint Voice Application CP 3413 DID NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet Use the DID NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet Figure 3 2 to organize the data The rest of Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 29 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 this chapter explains concepts you need to know for completing the worksheet and using it to configure the DID NuPoint Voice application Sections of the worksheet are explained in the follo
38. deliver a call placement message after a Ring No Answer call Enter Number of retries from 1 through 255 Default 10 retries RNA Retry Interval Sets how long the server waits between tries to deliver a call placement message after a Ring No Answer call Enter Minutes from 1 through 255 Default 60 minutes Busy Retry Limit Sets how many times the server tries to deliver a call placement message after a Busy call Enter Number of retries from 1 through 255 Default 10 retries Busy Retry Interval Sets how long the server waits between tries to deliver a call placement message after a Busy call Enter Minutes from 1 through 255 Default 10 minutes Message Phone Length Sets the maximum number of digits a user can enter for a call placement phone number Enter Number of digits from 1 through 25 Default 7 digits Recipient Count Sets the total number of telephone numbers that the user can enter for a single message This applies to both the Call Placement and AMIS optional features copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 117 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Enter Number of phone numbers from 0 through 190 Default 190 Maximum Message Length Sets how long a message can be for a call placement phone number Enter Minutes from 0 through 60 0 means no limit Default 5 minutes Interactions amp Limitations The average length of call placement messages affects t
39. dialing plan on this worksheet that tells the server that mailboxes starting with the specified digit are actually telephone numbers Figure 4 2 shows a sample NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet for call placement See the NuPoint Voice Application chapter for more information e The Mailbox Worksheet organizes information you need to configure individual mailboxes for paging message delivery or call placement or any combination of these functions Figure 4 3 shows a sample Mailbox Worksheet for paging e Ifyou are including call placement in this application specify the appropriate outdial index and access type for call placement Also specify the appropriate FCOS and LCOS for call placement e The Outdial Line Group Worksheet organizes information you need to configure the line group that outdials paging and message delivery calls and identify the pager system Figure 4 4 shows a sample Outdial Line Group Worksheet for paging Figure 4 2 Sample NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet for Call Placement Figure 4 3 Sample Mailbox Worksheet for Paging Figure 4 4 Sample Outdial Line Group Worksheet for Paging Defining a Line Group Use the information in the following paragraphs for entries on the NuPoint Voice Worksheet and Outdial Line Group Worksheet Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 41 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Guidelines for Port Allocation The server requires at least one port to o
40. distribution list created before the RCOS change to contain some restricted telephone numbers A restriction check is performed before each outdialing sequence to avoid calls being placed to restricted telephone numbers If a telephone number fails the check a receipt is generated stating The following telephone numbers are restricted number 1 number 2 etc This receipt is always generated regardless of a mailbox owner request for cancellation of a receipt 9 Administration by Phone This chapter covers e Timing considerations for Administration by Phone e Security for the administrator s mailbox e Adding deleting and modifying mailboxes by phone e Changing mailbox passcodes and enabling or disabling a tutorial by phone e Changing the server clock by phone e Performing a server backup by phone e Server and mailbox usage statistics Overview The NuPoint Messenger server allows the server administrator to perform some administrative functions from a telephone This feature is very convenient if the console is located at some distance from the server administrator s work station Administration by Phone cannot completely replace console administration telephone administration software supports only a limited number of the features that are available from the console However it is very convenient for certain functions For example you cannot add a mailbox with NP Receptionist treatment types over the telephone
41. from user name The recipient can accept reject delay or hold the call for 30 seconds If the call is accepted the message plays and the recipient can reply to the message Call placement is compatible with all applications and integrations It has these features e Users can send a single message to any number and combination of mailboxes and call placement numbers e The server retries delivery until successful e The server administrator can adjust redialing interval and frequency e A user can give an existing message to an outside number e Calls can be passcode protected to ensure only the intended recipient can play the message e Limits for call placement can be set through the LCOS and RCOS see the Other Classes of Service chapter e The server notifies users about calls that cannot be delivered e The server can track the number of calls for billing purposes e Message delivery calls can be billed to a mailbox owner s credit card or other billing account Summary of Configuration Requirements Paging configuration occurs in two primary areas the server configuration data and the mailbox configuration of each mailbox that uses the Pager application You may also need to set up the Feature Class of Service FCOS and Limits Class of Service LCOS used in the mailbox configuration Message delivery is implemented the same way as paging with one addition when configuring a mailbox the Message Delivery parameter i
42. get an outside line listen for another dial tone dial 1 408 555 9876 listen for a computer tone then dial 555 1234 and press to finish the page This causes John s pager to beep only The dial strings for these actions is Caller Action Dial Strings Wait for dial tone T Tell the PBX that you want an outside line 9 Wait for dial tone to confirm that you have the outside line T Call the pager company s number 14085559876 Wait 2 seconds for the line to settle Wait for a computer tone G Dial the call back number 555 1234 Enter to indicate end and make paging terminal hang up When a number outside the PBX is outdialed followed by a G Greet extra characters Wait One Second should precede the G This is done because line noise during call setup of particularly noisy switching equipment can be misinterpreted as a greeting by the server If pagers are in widespread use at John s company it is very likely that more than one employee s pager is on the same pager company system number so the dial string for this pager can be organized like this Pager system dial string T9T14085559876 G Pager number 1234 or PIN Post pager number None If you do not reach John on the first page he wants you to try again every 10 minutes for a maximum of four tries The other information needed for the Mailbox Worksheet for the pager as follows Pager frequency 4 Pager interval 10 Message deliver
43. ignored Enter Number of hours from 1 through 8760 8760 hours 1 year or enter a period a or O to ignore this Default 0 no limit Prompt Language Selection Menu Provides a language or Prompt Set for the mailbox that differs from the language or Prompt Set for the line group Enter The letter or digit that represents the alternate language or Prompt Set The selections vary according to which optional features are installed Default English Tips amp Techniques The system administrator sets the default language at the system level line group Group Class of Service This section describes Howa GCOS works copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 121 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Bitmapped GCOSs e Affinity group GCOSs e Recommendation for degrees of flexibility One way communication using an empty GCOS e Interaction between GCOS and FCOS e Configuration requirements Overview Mailbox owners cannot send and receive any messages unless the configuration of every mailbox includes a Group Class of Service GCOS The GCOS which is essential to the operation of the system manages communication among mailboxes for a particular set of users The GCOS allows for the following e It gives a system administrator the means to manage a large system with many mailbox owners a useful option when some users need to exchange messages with each other but not with the majo
44. included in the base NuPoint Voice software and must be specifically configured Outcall See Outdial Outdial Creation of DTMF tones by the server when it originates a telephone call such as when paging a user Outdial index A number from 0 to 15 that indicates which pager system to use There are three available outdial indexes internal billed and unbilled This information is set up in a user s mailbox Formerly called pager system access code index Pager Also radio pager the device activated by a Paging system Pager application The NuPoint Voice application that allows paging message delivery and call placement Pager number A dial string used to dial a pager Used with the outdial index and the post pager number all three of which are stored in the user s mailbox Pager system A dial string used to access a group of pagers This information is stored when configuring the Pager application Referred to by the outdial index and used with the pager number and post pager number to reach a particular pager Sometimes called access code Pager system access code See Outdial index Paging Process where the NuPoint Voice application outdials a pager number to activate a user s pager when a new message is received Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 206 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Parent mailbox Mailbox that routes users and callers to child mailboxes P
45. including 1 then an area code used to access the pager system Calls to the pager company telephone number are answered with signals or recorded instructions which indicate that the system is ready to accept the individual pager number Many pagers use DID where each radio pager is assigned its own unique telephone number In these cases there is no pager company telephone number Individual Pager Number This is the address of the specific pager and is usually 4 to 6 digits long For DID pagers the pager number is a regular 7 or 11 digit phone number When the pager is activated the system normally returns a beep beep beep signal or recorded instructions For a display pager this means that the system is ready to receive display information Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 56 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Display Number This is the string of digits that is displayed on the viewer of a display pager Most display pagers accommodate a 16 digit number Usually this string is specified as the post pager number Other Activation Codes Each pager manufacturer has modifications to the activation code that you must identify before configuring pagers For example most paging systems encourage a tone to be sent after the display information to speed call processing Example 1 A DID Tone Pager To page John Smith manually you lift the telephone receiver wait for a dial tone dial 9 to
46. indicator Serial Port or Modem Requirement To use any RS 232 message waiting indicators interface an RS 232 cable must be run from a server serial port to the PBX or in the case of CentrexRS 232 MWI interface to a modem that communicates with the Central Office The physical setup uses RS 232 pins 2 3 and 4 with communications parameters of 1200 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity full duplex and no flow control If you have an expansion serial port card installed in your server you can use as many serial ports as necessary for the programmable RS232 message waiting application You first assign and configure a single serial port using index 1 and then any additional ports assigned to the application will adopt the configuration of the first port RS 232 Message Waiting ndicators I nterface Worksheet Complete an RS 232 Message Waiting Indicators Interface Worksheet A blank worksheet is located in Volume 2 of this Manual Then see Message Waiting Indicators in the task list for configuration procedures Pre Programmed I nterfaces A server can operate with a variety of pre programmed interfaces These are described briefly in the following paragraphs SL 1 Background Terminal Facility Use this message waiting indicators interface when the SL 1 background terminal facility X37 release 3 message waiting protocol is required Note This option has been superseded in SL 1 software Unresolved conflicts can occur wit
47. is created the rotation cycle begins with the lowest copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 101 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 numbered mailbox If the list is unsorted when it is created the rotation cycle begins with the first mailbox entered in the list Distribution lists are allowed in child mailboxes for example to create a nested arrangement but they are not needed for the rotational arrangement to work Members Identify all child mailboxes as members of distribution list 01 in the rotational mailbox Template NP Forms Mailboxes NP Forms is an optional feature and provides an information template function voice forms for a server A NP Forms mailbox plays the greetings stored in its child mailboxes sequentially and records a message after each greeting A typical application must have a rotational mailbox with several child NP Forms mailboxes all pointing to the same list of Greeting Only mailboxes Tree Mailboxes A tree mailbox provides a call routing capability It plays a greeting then prompts the caller to enter a single digit to obtain more information After entering the desired digit the caller is routed to achild mailbox A tree mailbox is sometimes called a bulletin board mailbox A mailbox owner can set up a tree mailbox by creating distribution list 01 then adding the numbers of the child mailboxes into this list The lowest numbered mailbox number can be r
48. is played before normal messages Messages marked Urgent are put in a different queue and can be treated differently User Also called mailbox user A person who has one or more voice mailboxes in the server and is logged into it Users may have extensive call processing options such as play messages answer messages give messages keep messages and use distribution lists Contrast with server superuser NuPoint Voice superuser and console user User Distribution list See Mailbox owner distribution list User ID User identifier A security feature consisting of a unique identifier of up to 17 letters that is required as the first step in logging in to a server The server superuser each NuPoint Voice Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 210 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 superuser and each console user have a user ID User options Choices that the server announces to users during a call When a user presses the U key 8 on the keypad while listening to the main menu the server presents the user with some or all of these options name greeting passcode distribution lists tutorial pagers User tutorial See Standard tutorial VMUI F A set of voice messaging prompts used by a number of vendors This user interface is distinct from the standard NuPoint Voice application user interface Voice message See message Voice processing Generic term for any equipment that can handl
49. key the caller hears whatever names match When no is specified and a caller stops entering letters the server waits for a time out period before responding if a caller presses the key the server responds immediately If the server can determine exactly who the intended recipient is it plays that recipient s name and mailbox number if not suppressed Alternatively the server plays for outside callers that recipient s personal greeting If more than one recipient s name matches the caller s input the server plays the names and mailbox numbers of the possible recipients A caller can interrupt the server during name or greeting play by pressing any key on the telephone keypad Single Digit Access Specifying single digit access means that a caller can enter a single digit to reach a mailbox after matched names have been played similar to a tree mailbox operation When single digit access is allowed a match with the name dialed by a caller causes the server to play a prompt such as There are three entries Jean Brown mailbox 4321 press 1 John Brown mailbox 4222 press 2 Jill Brown mailbox 4567 press 3 Enter a mailbox number Press 0 to return to Dial by Name The caller can then press the appropriate digit to reach the desired person instead of entering the entire mailbox number When no single digit access is allowed a caller must enter an entire mailbox number to reach a mailbox after matched names have been
50. line T Dial the number of the pharmacy branch 12135556598 To send the message the pharmacy headquarters makes the message and sends it to a distribution list that contains all the pharmacies numbers This list is created either at the server maintenance console or by the user at a telephone see the Distribution Lists chapter If the dialing plan is set to make 8 the call placement digit for example 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 T 3 the distribution list looks like this Distribution List 01 Members 712135556598 712135551434 T12135557969 etc This sends the message to each phone number in the list To add call placement to a mailbox specify the pager system in the appropriate outdial index prompt then respond to the call placement pager access type prompt as follows Billed outdial index or unbilled outdial index 1 A pager system set to T9T Call Placement access type BorU Testing the Configuration After telephone lines have been installed and after you create mailboxes for a Pager application test each mailbox Note It is very important to test a pager immediately after it is added to a mailbox since a seemingly minor error in configuration can cause every page to fail Furthermore the server can tie up pager ports for a long time dialing invalid paging codes Testing Paging Before performing individual test steps configure the Event Recorder and enable it After testing is completed disable the Event Recorder For det
51. low usage rate 0 64 999 with a max of 3 places after decimal ADJUST BILLING RATES Page 7 Rate Low Usage Boundary High Usage Pager Number 4 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 5 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 6 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 7 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 8 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 9 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 10 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 11 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 12 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 13 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 14 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 15 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Pager Number 16 Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Base Rate 1 UNLIMITED 0 000 Base Rate 2 FULL GUEST 0 00 Base Rate 3 RESTRICTED 0 00 Base Rate 4 CHECK IN 0 00 Fl Nxt Pg F2 Prev Pg F3 First F4 Last F9 Cancel F10 Save Home Help Enter low usage rate 0 64 999 with a max of 3 places after decimal Figure 11 1 Full Screen I nterface for Billing Rates Scrolling Menu I nterface If you are using Scrolling Menus then Billing Rates are set through several different menus depending on the type of rate The Billing Worksheet described later in this chapter is divided into sections that correspond with the separate menu choices Some of the rates belong in other menus because the full screen Adjust Billing Rate entry screens are arranged differently These items are indicated by having the correct section name following the rate name in parentheses Gath
52. minute intervals you would assign a frequency of 2 and an interval of 5 to the primary pager in the mailbox and a frequency of 3 and an interval of 30 to the alternate pager both through the first message waiting type parameter 6 Note The pager numbers are sometimes called pager 1 pager 2 pager 3 and pager 4 Pager 2 is an alternate for pager 1 using the first message waiting type parameter and pager 4 is an alternate for pager 3 using the second message waiting type parameter See the following table These numbers are allocated by how many pager numbers are set up however Designation Message Message Waiting Waiting Type Type Parame Parame ter 1 ter 2 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 48 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Primar Pager 1 Pager 3 Alternate Pager 2 Pager 4 Paging and Message Delivery in the Same Mailbox You cannot assign both paging and message delivery to the same Message Waiting Indicator If you want to assign both Paging and Message Delivery to the same mailbox be sure each has a different indicator You can use any of the four different indicators MWI1 primary MWI1 alternate MWI2 primary MWI2 alternate to accomplish this Other Mailbox Parameters Other Pager application parameters that you can set in the mailbox configuration are listed below Pager interval This is the length of time 0 255 minutes the serve
53. or generating the report as long as a new gather is not performed If you find any errors in rates after the report is run adjust the rates then run the report again omitting the gather Note f you are counting the fields in the Blocked Billing Report please be aware that the department code field may be blank If there is no department code for a mailbox there will be a blank space not a zero All other fields will be represented by a zero There are 102 possible fields in the Blocked Billing Report When charges have been reported for all mailboxes the server concludes this report with a Billing Report Summary Statistics are not reported if the dollar amount is zero Figure 12 22 Sample Billing Report Billing Report of a Greeting Only Mailbox Greeting Only mailboxes also called information only mailboxes have an FCOS that does not allow them to receive messages Statistics that can be incremented for Greeting Only mailboxes are the user connect time that is the amount of time that the user is logged in and the caller connect time the accumulated time that callers have used to listen to the greeting A base rate can also be set See Figure 12 23 for a Sample Billing Report Greeting Only Mailbox Figure 12 23 Sample Billing Report Greeting Only Mailbox MAILBOX 303 ID MOVIE TIMES CODE Region 3 GROUP SELF 20 00 FCOS 6 GREETING ONLY base rate 6 48 648 greetings played 2 00 1 times logged 75 2 user connec
54. outdial string into the pager number field you still must choose an outdial index to assign a pager system If you do not select an outdial index for a pager schedule the server cannot issue a page when a message is left in that mailbox You can obtain a printout of pager systems and their indexes and dial strings either by running the pager access codes report from the Reports Menu or when you are creating a mailbox and the server prompts for the outdial index by requesting help The server displays the available indexes dial strings and pager names paging system names as in the following example Figure 4 5 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 46 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Figure 4 5 Sample Report of Pager Systems Access Codes Enter one of the following index numbers Index Dial String Paging System Name Oe ee TOT Outside line ds T9T1415 415 Area Code Ques T9T1408 408 Area Code Bes T9T1916325 PAGER 916 325 4 T Internal Pager calls Bas Empty 6 No Name Tes No Name 8 No Name Oss No Name TO cia No Name DA sce No Name VW ss No Name T3 esi No Name 14 No Name 1S s No Name Note that in this sample pager systems 6 through 15 have no name These are pager systems that are not yet set up Pager system 5 Empty is set up for use with pagers whose entire dial strings are contained in the pager number I
55. paging or message delivery number a user enters from the keypad Such characters include G and T Mailbox owners cannot alter this post pager number from the keypad Post pager numbers are limited to 24 digits copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 47 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Pager Frequency The pager frequency is the maximum number of times that the server attempts to notify the user of an unplayed message if each page is successful The default pager frequency is 3 A page is considered successful if the server places the call and it is answered In other words the server does not encounter a busy signal reorder tone or Ring No Answer after the pager message delivery call is made After a successful page is made the server waits the number of minutes that are specified for the pager interval see below then if there is still an unplayed message in the mailbox repeats the page If the page is unsuccessful the server retries the number until a successful page is made For this reason it is very important that you make a test call to verify that pager configuration is correct Alternate Pagers Each mailbox can be configured with up to three message waiting types and all are activated simultaneously For example the first message waiting type could be a pager and the second message waiting type could be a message waiting light You do not need a message waiting type to use call p
56. phone number Enter Number of digits from 1 through 50 Default 7 digits Even More Limits Parameters Includes options for message recipients and distribution lists The system checks the value for Max Members per Distribution List when it sends a message Set the value for Max Recipients Count to be equal to or greater than the Max Members per Distribution List Otherwise users may not be able to send a message to all members of a distribution list even if the list has a valid number of members You can create a distribution list with more members than the LCOS permits but the system sends messages only to the first n members where n is the value for Max Members per Distribution List Max Days NP WakeUp Limits the time in the future that a user can schedule a wakeup call See also the WP WakeUp Guide Enter Days from 0 through 365 0 means no limit Default 0 Max Days Reminder Call No usefd Max Reminder Calls per Billing Not used Max Destinations per Reminder Call Not used Max Members per Distribution List Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 115 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Sets the maximum number of members in a distribution list Enter Number of members from 0 through 65 535 0 is the same as 65535 Default 200 Max Recipients Count Sets the total number of possible recipients of a message in any combination of mailboxes distribution lists
57. routed to the attendant s mailbox If feature bit 120 Default to first child mailbox of tree mailbox is included in the FCOS callers are routed to the first mailbox in the list The server then processes the call according to the FCOS assigned to the first child mailbox Feature bit 186 Default to last child mailbox of tree mailbox works similarly defaulting to the last mailbox in the list Shared Extension Mailbox To configure a tree mailbox where several people share one telephone extension you can use the suggested additional FCOS for Shared Extension Mailbox see Chapter 7 Features Class of Service The shared extension mailbox must contain distribution list 01 with all child mailboxes as members You can record a greeting for the mailbox the server automatically prompts the user with the child mailboxes names Each child mailbox must have an FCOS that contains feature bit 134 Broadcast message waiting only and distribution list 01 with the parent mailbox as the only member Each child mailbox can have aname recorded so the shared extension mailbox plays its greeting with user names If you don t record a name the mailbox number is played instead copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 103 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Here is an example of what a caller would hear You have reached Ivy Dormitory room 18 a custom greeting Then follows a standard greeting To leave a me
58. same voice The text of the Wait prompt is recorded as the last sentence of the company greeting e When neither a system attendant s number nor an attendant s mailbox is defined and the Wait prompt is enabled callers who wait are thanked for calling then disconnected e If you disable the Wait prompt and are using the Dial by Name function you must record the Press digit to dial by name prompt in your own voice The server prompt for Dial by Name plays if the Wait prompt is enabled Administrator s Mailbox Number The initial software installation contains 10 possible default administrator s mailboxes They are as follows 98 9999998 998 99999998 9998 999999998 99998 9999999998 999998 99999999998 Since the default dialing plan is 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 the default administrator s mailbox number is 998 If the ninth position digit is changed to any number between 2 and 11 the default administrator s mailbox number should be changed to the corresponding 9 8 number An error message is generated if the number does not match the mailbox dialing plan The administrator s mailbox can be any mailbox number on the server but if you select a mailbox number other than one of the defaults you must create the mailbox before it can be used The mailbox number you select must be allowed by the Dialing Plan Note For server security you should change the administrator s mailbox number from the default See Mailboxes in t
59. specialized phone system used for handling a large number of incoming calls which includes recorded announcements routing and call data logging Administration by phone The capability to perform certain server administrative functions through a telephone set instead of the server console This is usually done by the Administrator Administrator Person responsible for day to day server implementation changes and maintenance Administrator s mailbox Special mailbox belonging to the Administrator with system wide abilities Affinity group See GCOS Alternate MWI A backup message waiting indicator used when the mailbox owner does not respond to the primary MWI Alternate pager A backup pager used when the mailbox owner does not respond to the primary pager also copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 198 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 a mailbox configuration parameter that sets message delivery AMIS Audio Messaging Interchange Specification a council set up to develop a standard for exchange of voice messages between different vendors Used with the AMIS Analog Optional Feature Analog networking Networking scheme that reconverts voice messages to analog signals for transmission between two or more voice messaging systems Voice messages are sent over regular telephone lines Append Add comments to the end of a message Answer Send a new message to a user in resp
60. the veterinarian assigns FCOS 6 Greeting Only for each the veterinarian also records a different pet care message Messages Callers cannot leave messages in the rotational mailbox itself but they can leave messages in one of the child mailboxes if the child mailbox is assigned an FCOS that allows callers to leave messages You may have up to 190 child mailboxes in the rotational mailbox s distribution list 01 Greetings If you want the server to hang up after it plays the child mailbox greeting assign a Greeting Only FCOS to these child mailboxes including feature bit 062 Hang up immediately after greeting If you want each mailbox to provide an introductory announcement before connecting the caller with an employee give the child mailboxes an FCOS that includes feature bit 063 Call mailbox attendant after greeting or feature bit 064 Call mailbox s extension number after greeting Do not include feature bit 062 Hang up after greeting Be sure to include the attendant s or extension number in the appropriate field when creating the mailbox Rotational mailboxes can also be used with NP Forms applications see FCOS 16 Mailbox Status You can obtain information on existing rotational mailbox parameters such as whether the mailbox is the period or index type by using the MailboxDump option in the Mailbox Maintenance menu Figure 6 7 Sample Period Type Rotational Mailbox Figure 6 8 Sample I ndex Type Rotational Mailb
61. to make 3 attempts to reach her and each attempt should be 30 minutes apart These are the default values for pager frequency and pager interval The paging Mailbox Worksheet entries are Pager access type l Bor U internal billed or unbilled outdial index Pager frequency 3 default Pager interval 30 default Message delivery No Example 4 Voice Pager Joe Stockman works in a huge warehouse that is located behind the factory Since the only telephone is located in the warehouse office Joe was given a voice pager which allows employees to notify him when they want to pick up stock To access this pager manually you lift the telephone receiver wait for a dial tone dial extension 6457 wait for his mailbox to answer leave your order as a message then hang up The dial string for these actions is Caller Action Dial String Wait for dial tone and go off hook T Dial extension number 6457 Wait for answer hello and speak your order G Play newest message to Joe s voice pager and hang up V Note If you enter a V for voice pager do not turn message delivery on when configuring the mailbox For in house paging it is useful to set up a pager system that either has no dial string or has the T Wait for Dial Tone code Since this call does not access an outside line no pluses need to be added before the Greet command This is organized into the following dial string Pager system dial string T Pager
62. user identifier user ID and password for verification before you can reach any of the server menus Access to the menus is based on the authorization level of your user ID and password copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 142 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 FPSA allows access to menus only to persons who are authorized through permission categories In addition FPSA requires passwords of all users logging in Using FPSA You must activate FPSA at your site from the Security menu then configure it as desired before it is operational While there is no charge for FPSA you must specifically order it Once FPSA is activated you can reach menus at the server maintenance console only if you have the proper permission category or categories Every server menu is associated with one or more permission categories Password There are additional restrictions on passwords when FPSA is installed e When FPSA is installed passwords must contain at least one letter one digit and one punctuation mark For example 13nuts c or o ster1 e Users must change their passwords periodically default is 30 days The new password must be different from the old one The server issues a reminder notice at login warning that the password must be changed the default reminder period is seven days If the password is not changed before the expiration date the server forces the user to change passwords after logg
63. using the Lights Test option mentioned earlier however if an actual test call is made you can check server prompts and the mailbox user interface at the same time See the task list for procedures Volume 2 of this manual The server can outdial very quickly too quickly for some PBXs One result can be that the server fails to get an outside line To prevent this situation try slowing down the server s outdialing speed You do this by inserting pluses in dial strings Each plus tells the server to pause for one second For example suppose you have the following outdial string e 7974155551212 You can slow the pacing of the sequence by inserting two pluses after each major step in the string The result would be as shown below T9T 4155551212 If this result works you can experiment by removing one pause at a time to achieve the fastest speed that your PBX can handle Testing Call Placement To test call placement log into the server and press M to make a message If you configured the mailbox with the correct FCOS you are prompted about which digit to press for making a message for a telephone number Address the message to a telephone number make the message then send it Verify that the message is delivered to the telephone number Make a message for a telephone number by specifying the call placement dialing plan digit and the phone number itself Do not include the numbers to get an outside line this shou
64. write current cylinder 0 Step rate 0 Landing zone 3069 RPL 0 Rotational offset 0 Rotational offset 5400 Disk capacity 3933039 Phonebook Report The server allows you to produce a phonebook listing mailbox owners If the Dial by Name function is enabled and the FCOS assigned to a mailbox includes feature bit Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 197 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 092 User will be in Dial by Name database the mailbox owner s name is included in the Dial by Name database The server uses the Dial by Name database to create a telephone book when you choose the Phonebook Report option in the Reports Menu The Phonebook Report is an alphabetic listing of mailbox names that shows the corresponding mailbox number and GCOS assigned to the mailbox see sample in Figure 12 40 As with other reports you can print the Phonebook Report on a serial printer or other output device connected to your server through serial port 1 or serial port 2 or display it at the server maintenance console Figure 12 40 Sample Phonebook Report gt gt gt Acme Management Systems lt lt lt PHONEBOOK Tue Apr 31 1995 12 57 pm NAME MATLBOX GCOS ATTEND MB 3850 2 Allen Debbi 3852 9 Allen Richard 511 14 Bau Lee 255 14 Barry Randall 601 14 Borregas Rita 3809 9 Glossary Access code A dial string used by the Pager application See Pager system ACD Automatic Call Distributor a
65. 0 0 0 0 HOUR 12 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALLS 0 0 0 0 0 HIGHEST USAGE 0 sec at 8 9 10 11 12 hr LOWEST USAGE 0 sec at 8 9 10 11 12 hr DAY 01 LINE 1 3 HOUR 08 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALLS 0 0 0 0 0 Reading the Standard Line Usage Report The report heading shows the date and time that the report was run The first line of the report shows the date and time interval during which the data were gathered DAY 01 LINE 1 3 0 The data displayed immediately below refer to module 1 slot 3 port 0 the triplet 1 3 0 on Monday 00 14 indicates that data in that column were gathered during the first fifteen minutes of the hour 15 29 refers to the second 15 minutes of the hour etc TOTAL copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 163 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 The data for the four 15 minute intervals If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical value it means that the data have not yet been gathered For example if the report is run at 3 30 p m and the report interval is for hours 12 15 noon to 3 p m the entries for hour 15 3 to 4 p m show hyphens USAGE The percentage of the hour the line was busy SECONDS The total number of seconds in the time period during which the line was busy CALLS The number of calls that were received by that line for the time period HIGHEST USAGE The greatest total
66. 01 in the rotational mailbox controls the rotating or cycling of callers through the child mailboxes Rotational mailboxes do not require greetings which can be useful in some applications You make a standard mailbox rotational by assigning FCOS 17 Rotational to it You make a standard mailbox a child mailbox by including it in the distribution list of the rotational mailbox Callers cannot leave messages in the rotational mailbox itself but they can leave messages in one of the child mailboxes if the child mailbox is assigned an FCOS that allows callers to leave messages You may have up to 190 child mailboxes in the rotational mailbox s distribution list 01 Period Type Rotational Mailboxes To illustrate a use of a period type rotational mailbox suppose that a restaurant owner wants all callers to hear the special of the day Tuesday callers for example would hear the restaurant greeting and the special for Tuesday Wednesday callers would hear the restaurant greeting and the special for Wednesday and so on Figure 6 7 illustrates this example In this example the restaurant owner would assign FCOS 17 Rotational Mailboxes to one mailbox mailbox 100 and record a restaurant greeting for this mailbox For this mailbox the owner would also create distribution list 01 containing seven child mailboxes mailboxes 101 107 To each of the seven child mailboxes the owner would assign FCOS 6 Greeting Only for each the owner would als
67. 1313 G G1234 I T 9T14085551313 G jH G1234 Same as Dial String in the report of outdial indexes Figure 4 5 In each of these examples the individual pager number was put in the post pager number You can see that the page works no matter how the balance of the string is split between pager and post pager numbers Note When designing your paging setup choose your pager system dial strings carefully You can only refer to 16 pager system access codes per server Mailbox Configuration To use the Pager application you must configure mailbox parameters as well as offline and online parameters Use this section to see which parameters you must change You must set different mailbox parameters for each capability paging message delivery call placement The specifics of each capability are discussed at the end of this section General Considerations Since you are configuring the server to outdial you want it to duplicate the steps that you would take to activate the pager or to place the phone call You must configure these steps into the Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 45 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 pager system and pager number You can configure up to four pagers per mailbox Creating or Modifying Mailboxes for a Pager Application After specifying the classes of service you identify the outdial index for the pager system as an internal outdial bill
68. 15 13 328231 55769 15 14 328473 55527 14 15 327908 56092 15 16 327062 56938 15 17 325930 58070 15 Reading the Speech Usage Summary Report The Speech Usage Summary Report see sample in Figure 12 11 displays the number of speech blocks used and free and the percent of speech storage used by hour The summary report is much less specific than the standard report but it allows you to determine the hours when speech storage is at its peak and which hours have relatively little speech storage The results of this report can be compared with the results of the Message Usage Report to obtain an accurate picture of message and non message related speech storage If names and greetings consume too large a percentage of speech storage leaving too little storage for transient messages the server administrator can either decrease the maximum greeting length allowed in the LCOSs for that server or limit the recording of names for certain FCOSs or both Fax Group Usage Report This report covers NuPoint Fax statistics showing transactions use resources and busy line information for NuPoint Fax groups A NuPoint Fax group is a set of fax ports on an MVIP bus Each MVIP bus is specific to one module Line groups can be assigned to a NuPoint Fax group so the fax resources are shared Figure 12 12 shows a Sample Standard Fax Group Usage Report Figure 12 13 shows a sample Fax Group Usage Summary Report Figure 12 12 Sample Fax Group Us
69. 2 Maximum Attachments per Network Message Limits the number of messages that the user can attach when making or giving a message in a network environment For more information see the guides for the AMIS Analog NP Net and VPIM optional features Enter Number between 1 and 72 to reset to the default enter a period Default 72 Message Delivery Login Delay Sets how many times the server will try to deliver message a while waiting for the passcode Each try takes 5 seconds Enter Seconds from 0 to 255 Default 5 seconds More Limits Parameters Includes parameters related to some ouidial functions NP WakeUp Phone Length Sets the maximum number of digits a user can enter for a wakeup call phone number Enter Number of digits from 1 to 24 Default 7 digits Paging Phone Length Sets the maximum number of digits a user can enter for a pager phone number Enter Number of digits from 1 to 24 Default 7 digits Message Delivery Phone Length Sets the maximum number of digits a user can enter to for a message delivery phone number Enter Number of digits from 1 through 24 Default 7 digits Future Delivery Message Count copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 113 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Sets the maximum number of messages that can be stored in a mailbox s future delivery queue Enter Number from 1 through 99 0 prevents storage a period re
70. 3 This is not needed when creating a list from the telephone just enter the list number for example 03 For complete information refer to the Mailbox task list in Volume 2 of this manual Note If you send a message to a nested list that contains many mailboxes a mailbox owner can receive a message twice This can happen if a mailbox appears in two lists and the mailbox owner receives the message while the server is still processing the rest of the list If the mailbox owner discards the message the server can send another copy when it reaches to the second occurrence of the mailbox This is only an issue with very large nested distribution lists Distribution List nteraction With FCOS You can use the mailbox FCOS to control the ability to send messages to distribution lists receive messages sent to other lists or create or modify distribution lists As described above a feature bit prevents distribution list nesting Additional feature bits control whether mailbox owners can use master distribution lists The feature bits listed in Table 6 2 affect distribution list use Table 6 2 Feature Bits that Control Distribution Lists Feature Bits Descriptions 032 Make messages to user distribution list 033 Give messages to user distribution list 034 Make to master distribution list 035 Give to master distribution list 036 Auto receipt for user distribution list messages 044 Receive user distribution list messages 045 Receiv
71. 5 15 5 15 5 15 15 Reading the Standard Speech Block Usage Report The report heading shows the date and time that the report was run The first line of the report shows the date and time interval during which the data were gathered and the maximum number of available speech storage blocks on the server Max Speech Blks This line is repeated for each day in the report SPEEGH HOUR 15 The data displayed immediately below were gathered during the hour between 3 and 4 p m An entry of 00 14 indicates that data in that column were gathered during the first fifteen minutes of the hour an entry of 15 29 refers to the second 15 minutes of the hour etc AVERAGE copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 167 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 The average value of the four 15 minute samples If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical value it means that the data have not yet been gathered BLOCKS FREE The number of speech blocks that were not in use at the time of sampling PERCENT USED The number of speech blocks that were in use as percentage of the maximum number of speech blocks that are allowed on the server Figure 12 11 Speech Block Usage Summary Report AVERAGE SPEECH BLOCK USAGE SUMMARY REPORT Fri Apr 21 1995 10 58 am 04 17 95 8hr 17hr MAX BLOCKS 384000 HOUR FREE USED PERCENT 8 327175 56825 15 9 327723 56277 15 10 329312 54688 14 LI 328879 55121 14 12 328290 55710
72. 6 times for line group billing Disk usage 1 Calls to pagers 5 Calls for message delivery 5 FCOS number 3 LCOS number 3 GCOS number 5 Number of network messages 5 Number of urgent network messages 5 Number of network nodes sent to 5 Number of network nodes sent urgent to 5 Number of remote network recipients sent to 5 Number of remote network recipients sent urgent to 5 5 5 5 5 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 0 1 minute increments of network messages sent 0 1 minute increments of network messages sent urgent 0 1 minute increments of network nodes sent to 0 1 minute increments of network nodes sent urgent to 0 1 minute increments of remote network recipients sent to 0 1 minutes of remote network recipients sent urgent to Number of network receipt responses Number of network messages received Number of network urgent messages received 0 1 minute increments of message length received over network 0 1 minute increments of urgent message length received over network Number of fax messages received Number of fax messages made Number of fax messages retrieved Number of failed fax retrievals Fax disk usage Number of fax pages received Number of fax pages made Number of fax pages retrieved Number of fax retrievals billed Number of fax pages retrieved billed 01 0 aA A A gt OF1 aAa O1 O1 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 181 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Releas
73. 7 0 Disabling the Attendant s Mailbox When an outside caller accesses the message center number NuPoint Voice issues the prompt Please enter a mailbox number or wait Callers who wait are prompted to leave a message in the attendant s mailbox Some installations require these callers to be transferred to the system attendant s extension instead There are two ways to do this e Ifthe system administrator does not issue messages of the day delete the attendant s mailbox e Assign a Greeting Only FCOS to the attendant s mailbox Note If you disable the attendant s mailbox and you do not define a system attendant s extension number be sure to disable the Wait prompt Otherwise when a caller waits NuPoint Voice says Thank you for calling then hangs up Default Language for Prompts This entry specifies the primary language in which prompts are issued The default language is English You must purchase and install language prompts diskettes in order to use any other language on your server Table 2 8 lists some of the languages available Contact your distributor for further information A mailbox s LCOS can specify a different prompts language The prompts set of diskettes in the secondary language must be installed before these mailboxes issue any prompts at all Callers hear prompts in the default language Table 2 8 Some Supported Languages Full Set and Hotel Set Full Set Onl American English Austra
74. 9 you can keep the dialing plan at the default setting of 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 and assign all field personnel mailboxes 600 through 799 Dial by Name To configure the Dial by Name function you need to e Change the dialing plan to specify a digit for Dial by Name e Specify the name dialing sequence e Seta threshold for playing matching names e Specify whether a caller must enter a complete name or just enough letters to get a match e Specify whether a caller can press a single digit to reach a mailbox or must enter the entire mailbox number e Specify whether a caller hears matched names and mailbox numbers or just the matched names e Determine the grouping of access within the Dial by Name database sometimes called Partitioned Dial by Name Even though mailbox owners may all be in the same Dial by Name database they can only reach others in the database who share the same GCOS group in a bit mapped GCOS or affinity group Refer to the GCOS section in Chapter 8 for more information on GCOSs Dialing Plan In the Dialing Plan Menu coding a digit with the A element reserves that digit for dialing names Name Dialing Sequence You specify the name dialing sequence with the Last Name First Flag parameter This parameter determines whether a user s name must be dialed in the last name first name sequence or the first name last name sequence In most cases callers need not enter user s full name When a caller finis
75. 90000 85909 5 Speech Blocks 384000 314271 18 Account Sectors 57344 54218 5 E Sectors Speech Blocks Prompt Vid Total Free Used Total Free Used english 1 6000 4894 18 13365 11759 12 Calls answered since Thu Apr 20 1995 12 12 pm 1116 Reading the Total System Statistics Report The Total System Statistics Report entries have the following meanings copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 172 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 MESSAGE NUMBERS The links between the messages greetings and names associated with mailboxes and the mailboxes themselves Each message name or greeting uses one message number SPEECH BLOCKS All speech recorded through the telephone in the form of messages comments greetings list names and names Approximately 2 2 seconds of speech consume one speech block ACCOUNT SECTORS All mailbox and server information including users mailbox numbers distribution lists and passcodes and any phoneline exceptions One account sector is used for each mailbox distribution list and line with phoneline exceptions PROMPTS This new section lists each set of prompts loaded on your server and how much space is used in both hard drive sectors and in speech blocks You can use this data to determine whether you have room for additional prompts Virtual Drive Statistics Report This report shows how much of the storage capacity on each of the dr
76. Configuring the application e Using the NuPoint Voice application copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 11 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Overview The NuPoint Voice application provides voice messaging capability where each server user can have a personal mailbox It is the standard business application for NuPoint Messenger servers The NuPoint Voice application can be used with most Central Offices COs PBXs and with all key systems Other applications such as DID NuPoint Voice or the Pager application are variations of the NuPoint Voice application and are used either together with or instead of the NuPoint Voice application Numerous customized integrations which are also variations of the NuPoint Voice application are available These are optional features they provide message waiting control and functions such as personal greetings for forwarded calls See the specific integration documents in the for more information To use the NuPoint Voice application on your server you must perform any necessary system level configuration System level configuration through the NuPoint Voice application involves two steps defining the line group and configuring the application In the first step you assign server ports to the NuPoint Voice application In the second step you customize the application for your server Procedures covering these steps are available in Volume 2 of this manual
77. FPSA is implemented password requirements are strengthened See Functionally Partitioned System Administration later in this chapter To set a password without FPSA use the Change Password option The server stores passwords in one way encoded form When you enter your password the server encodes it then compares it to the stored password If you forget your password only the server superuser can reset it There is no mechanism for decoding a password to tell it to a person who forgot it Each time you log in thereafter the server displays the date and time of your last login The server also displays the number of your unsuccessful attempts if any since the last login You should review this information every time you log in Modem A modem on a serial port of the server can be used by you or by anyone else to gain access to all of the server maintenance and configuration capabilities You should take care to protect this access point from abuse If you do not intend to perform any remote maintenance or administration you do not need to connect a modem to a serial port The same login sequence described above applies to any remote access using the modem Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 140 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 All servers are shipped with a default security banner You can customize the banner if you wish Administrator s Mailbox The administrator s mailbox can be us
78. Indication Outside Callers vs Mailbox Owners In many discussions of server mailboxes you encounter the terms caller outside caller user owner or mailbox owner There is a difference between outside callers and mailbox owners or users A caller dials the server number enters a mailbox number listens to the mailbox greeting or prompt such as Please leave a message for Kim Smith then leaves a message A person who is assigned a mailbox is a mailbox owner Owners can log into their own mailboxes play messages choose selections from a User Options Menu and select other voice messaging operations The term user usually refers to mailbox owners as opposed to outside callers as they are users on the server Mailbox Creation and Modification Mailbox creation deletion and modification are implemented in different ways depending on how your terminal has been configured Scrolling I nterface If you are using the scrolling menu interface then mailbox creation and modification are similar to that used in the Release 5 04 application Creation deletion and modification are three different menu choices Mailbox creation and modification both generate a set of prompts for the administrator to answer one at atime If you mistakenly answer one prompt incorrectly you cannot return to it you must finish the prompts and recreate or remodify that mailbox again The advantage of this method is that it works on any kind of t
79. M NIGHT M NAME CODE EXTEN INDEX 0 ATTEN DN INDEX 0 ACCESS NONE NOTIFICATION Y INTERNAL INDEX 0 BILLED INDEX 0 NON BILLED INDEX 0 WAKEUP Defined SYSTEM 0 FREQ 0 INTERVAL 0 NUMBER CALL PLACEMENT INDEX NONE TIME ZONE OFFSET 1 DISTRIBUTION LISTS WITH CHANGE RIGHTS all DISTRIBUTION LISTS WITH REVIEW RIGHTS all TOTAL Mailboxes 2 Messages 0 Unplayed 0 Urgent 0 Receipt 0 Minutes 0 0 Mailbox Usage Several different reports are available to show mailbox usage statistics Mailbox Data Inquiry Report This report shows message counts class of service assignments message waiting type the passcode status and login status You can obtain this information for one mailbox or a range of mailboxes The sample in Figure 12 29 shows a Sample Mailbox Data Inquiry Report for a range of mailboxes Figure 12 29 Sample Mailbox Data I nquiry Report Mailbox Data Inquiry Fri Apr 21 16 57 50 1995 Box Msgs Unp Urg Rec Mins FCOS LCOS GCOS NCOS MWI Passwd 3550 22 2 0 0 42 3 61 i I ai None Y 3551 0 0 0 0 0 0 31 1 al il None Y 3552 0 0 0 0 0 0 31 ne al al None Y Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 188 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 3553 6 0 0 0 14 6 44 all 1 all None Y 3555 15 3 0 0 48 8 14 Alt 1 1 None Y TOTAL Mailboxes 5 Messages 43 Unplayed 5 Urgent 0 Receipt 0 Minutes 105 7 The columns of data in the Mailbox Data Inquiry Report are as follows Box The number of the mailbox inquired
80. Message Retention Sets how long an unplayed message can remain in a mailbox before it is deleted by automatic purging copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 119 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Enter Number of hours from 1 through 8760 1 year 0 for no limit a period to prevent automatic purging Default 336 hours 14 days Urgent Message Retention Sets how long a played or unplayed urgent message can remain in a mailbox before it is deleted by automatic purging Enter Number of hours from 1 through 8760 1 year O for no limit a period to prevent automatic purging Default 336 hours 14 days Cut Through Paging Receipt Retention Sets how long a receipt for a cut through paging message can remain in a mailbox before it is deleted by automatic purging For more information see the Cut Through Paging guide Enter Number of hours from 1 through 8760 1 year O for no limit a period to prevent automatic purging Default 672 hours 28 days Receipt Retention Sets how long a receipt for a message can remain in a mailbox before it is deleted by automatic purging Enter Number of hours from 1 through 8760 0 for no limit a period to prevent automatic purging Default 672 hours 28 days Played Fax Message Retention Sets how long a played fax can remain in a mailbox before it is deleted by automatic purging Requires the NuPoint Fax optional feature
81. Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Reference and Configuration Manual Volume 1 Reference I nformation 2700 1398 B1 Issue 2 Contents Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Distributed Courtesy of sss PROMEMO IiNCoORPORATED http www promemoinc com P O Box 1899 Brentwood CA 94513 Main 925 513 7510 Fax 925 775 7039 Support support promemoinc com Sales sales promemoinc com General info promemoinc com Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 About This Manual This manual describes how to configure the NuPoint Voice software in any of these NuPoint Messenger servers e Model 640 e Model 120 e Model 70 Who Should Read This Manual This manual is intended for technicians and administrators who are responsible for configuring software on the NuPoint Messenger system How to Use This Manual This manual contains two volumes Volume 1 includes reference chapters and a glossary Volume 2 includes tasks lists procedures and user aids such as worksheets and menu maps Reference Chapters The reference chapters 1 through 12 located in Volume 1 provide details about the NuPoint Messenger software configuration These chapters discuss how components are related elaborate on concepts give operational details and contain tables and figures about configuration The System mpleme
82. ON If the system superuser forgets his or her password he or she cannot access the server let alone perform any of the FPSA activities just mentioned The only way a system superuser can be reinstated is to perform the password bypass in the Task List Volume 2 of this manual System Administrator NuPoint Voice system administrators can perform all activities described in this manual except FPSA activities They do have access to the Change Password option in the FPSA menu however for changing their own passwords This form of user is one with Category 2 permission Console User Console users can configure the server or maintain mailboxes or obtain reports or administer the network or perform any combination of these activities depending on their permission categories Console users can also change their own passwords Activating FPSA You can activate and deactivate FPSA only with the FPSA diskette at the server maintenance console This is a controlled diskette that is released to a designated individual at your site after a server is installed When activating FPSA be prepared to take notes All current user IDs must be given permission categories and each user ID must be given a password If a user ID has a password it is marked for 24 hour expiration so the user should be notified to change it User IDs without passwords are given temporary passwords by the server also marked to expire in 24 hours The system superuser sho
83. Recipient count 190 Maximum message length 5 minutes ORERE Table 8 5 NuPoint Fax Limits Menu A Maximum number of digits for telephone number 7 digits B NuPoint Fax message count 72 C Pre greet silence interval to improve walkaway CNG detection length 0 seconds D Fax delivery retry frequency 1 retry E Fax deliver retry interval 1 minute Table 8 6 Message Retention Limit Menu Message retention 0 no limit Played message retention 672 hours Unplayed message retention 336 hours Urgent message retention 336 hours Cut through paging receipt retention 672 hours Receipt retention 672 hours Played fax message retention 672 hours Unplayed fax message retention 336 hours Urgent fax message retention 336 hours Fax receipt retention 672 hours Absolute message retention 0 no limit A A PBONWUPANDCYE Table 8 7 Prompt Language Selection D Use default Other Prompt set options are listed according to which optional features are installed Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 109 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 LCOS for the Administrator s and Attendant s Mailboxes For best results assign the default LCOS LCOS 1 to both the administrator s and the attendant s mailboxes LCOS 1 with the appropriate FCOS and GCOS supports the special functions for these mailboxes Interaction Bet
84. Removes the 9 in accordance with the absorption table copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 128 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 2 Compares to the exact match table and blocks the call because the number matches and the table is a disallow table If a dial string is 15102265678 the system 1 Removes the 1 in accordance with the absorption table 2 Compares to the exact match table 3 Compares the NPA 510 Places the call because the NPA 510 does not have an associated NXX table and the NPA table is set to allow As the preceding examples show NPA NXX call screening works well for domestic outdials For restricting international outdials the best method is to limit the number of digits that can be dialed to less than the length of an international telephone number Do this with an LCOS that includes any of these limits parameters as appropriate e NP WakeUp Phone Length e Maximum Number of Digits for Telephone Number e Message Delivery Phone Length e Message Phone Length e Paging Phone Length Then assign this LCOS to the desired mailboxes Refer to the Limits Class of Service section for information on LCOS configuration Configuration Requirements Organize the data you need to configure an RCOS on an RCOS Worksheet Blank worksheets are located near the end of this manual The worksheet will help you set parameters which are located in the RCOS menu The following paragr
85. S IN QUEUE MINUTES LATENCY DELIVERED UNDELIV RECEIVED BATCH 9 O 0 00 00 0 0 27 URGENT 0 O 0 00 00 0 1 lt MONDAY gt Date Mon Apr 17 23 15 06 1995 Last Reset Mon Apr 17 15 14 50 1995 Total Messages 90000 Lowest Messages Free 86234 Total Speech 384000 Lowest Speech Free 324377 Total Calls 0 Total Seconds 0 00 00 Line ATB Count 0 Line ATB Seconds 0 00 00 Fax Trans 20 Fax Total Secs 0 00 20 Fax ATB Count 0 Fax ATB Seconds 0 00 00 Fax No Res Cnt 0 NETWORKING lt PEAKS gt lt TOTALS gt MESSAGES IN QUEUE MINUTES LATENCY DELIVERED UNDELIV RECEIVED BATCH 55 0 0 00 00 0 0 354 URGENT 0 0 0 00 00 0 34 Reading the Complete Summary Report The Total System Statistics Report entries have the following meanings Each day of the week has a banner with the day name followed by the date and the date the server was last reset In the example above the last reset for Sunday was on Saturday the last reset for Monday was on Monday TOTAL MESSAGES This is the number of messages available on the server LOWEST MESSAGES FREE This is the smallest number of messages not in use that day Server checked every 15 minutes TOTAL SPEECH This is the number of speech blocks available on the server LOWEST SPEECH FREE This is the smallest number of speech blocks not in use that day server checked every 15 minutes TOTAL CALLS T
86. SSAGE HOUR 10 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE MESSAGE FREE 86641 86621 86641 86621 86631 PERCENT USED 4 4 4 4 4 MESSAGE HOUR 11 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE MESSAGE FREE 86593 86598 86592 86583 86591 PERCENT USED 4 4 4 4 4 Reading the Standard Message Usage Report The report heading shows the date and time that the report was run copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 165 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 The first line of the report shows the date and time interval during which the data were gathered and the total number of messages that were received during that time period This line is repeated for each day of the report MESSAGE HOUR 07 The data displayed immediately below was gathered during the hour between 7 and 8 a m 00 14 indicates that data in that column were gathered during the first fifteen minutes of the hour 15 29 refers to the second 15 minutes of the hour etc Note how the report covers data from 7 to 8 a m 8 to 9 a m and so on AVERAGE The average value of the four 15 minute samples If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical value it means that the data have not yet been gathered MESSAGE FREE The number of messages that were not in use at the time of sampling PERCENT USED The number of messages that were in use as percentage of the maximum number of messages that are allowed on the server Figure 12 9 Message Usage Summary Report
87. See the Mailbox Usage section of this chapter under Configuration and Usage Reports Message Count Statistics Shows the total number of messages that were used how many were free and the percentage of server storage that was used for a specific time period Speech Block Usage Shows the amount of speech storage that was in use and the amount available over a specified period of time Fax Group Usage Statistics Shows transactions use resources and busy line information for NuPoint Fax groups Complete Summary Report Also called Total Statistics Summary Report a Summary of all report statistics containing the most meaningful report information for each day of the entire week Total System Statistics Report Shows how much storage capacity on the hard disk has been consumed and how much is still available Virtual Drive Statistics Shows how much of the storage capacity on the each of the drive partitions has been consumed and how much Js still available Group Usage Report This report also called Line Groups All Trunks Busy Report shows how many times and for how many seconds every port in a line group is busy simultaneously This condition is called All copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 158 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Trunks Busy or ATB The server administrator must specify the line group s the start and stop times and the start and stop da
88. TING ONLY 000 00 7 DEMO 000 00 8 CHAIN 000 00 9 TIME 000 00 10 VIP 000 00 11 Res Call Ans 000 00 12 Res Call Ans 000 00 13 Bus Call Ans 000 00 14 Bus Call Ans 000 00 15 TREE 000 00 16 TEMPLATE 000 00 17 ROTATIONAL 000 00 62 lt No name gt 000 00 63 lt No name gt 000 00 64 lt No name gt 000 00 Billing Report The Billing Report see sample in Figure 12 22 is usually run monthly or weekly but can be run copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 179 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 as many times as you wish during a single billing cycle as long as you do not request another gather You can even run the report change billing rates then rerun the report if you wish The Billing Report first shows charges for each mailbox individually by GCOS then reports the charge for the FCOS assigned to the mailbox then lists the charges for each statistic that applies to the mailbox Next the Billing Report lists charges for each statistic that applies to a port line group such as user connect time and caller connect time When charges have been reported for all mailboxes the server gives a Billing Report summary then returns to the Billing menu See the sample in Figure 12 22 Statistics for which the dollar amount is zero are not reported Charges are based on the rates that are in effect at the time the report is generated No mailbox data is changed by adjusting rates
89. The default is No no wait Pre DN On or Off String This string is sent before the directory number extension number to instruct the PBX to turn the message waiting indicator on or off at that station There is no default Pre DN on or off string Note Never enter aT as the first part of the Pre DN on string because then the server waits for two separate dial tones Enter the coding if any that must be sent before the directory number to turn message waiting indicators on or off Suppress Updates to MWL Each time a mailbox receives a new message the server sends a request to the PBX to turn on the message indicator However if the user logs into the server listens to all the new messages and logs out a single indicator off request is sent to the PBX Some PBXs stack the indicator on requests Then when the single indicator off request is sent it cancels only one of the indicator on requests and the message indicator stays on To prevent the server from sending an indicator on request when the message indicator is already activated leave this feature at the Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 69 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 default setting of Yes This feature also cuts down on overall message waiting indicators traffic Table 5 1 PBX Special Access Code Characters Character Explanation 0 9 Keys on a standard pushbutton telephone The following digits should be dial pu
90. Usage CP 4361 Set Billing Rates for Pager Calls CP 4362 Setting Rates Each statistic can be calculated according to a low usage rate low high boundary and high usage rate The valid range for either rate is 0 00 through 64 99 The valid range for the low high boundary is 0 through 65535 The low usage rate applies to statistics that match or fall below the low high boundary All statistics that match or fall below this boundary are charged the same low usage rate The low high boundary is the point at which the rate changes from the low usage rate to the high usage rate The high usage rate applies to statistics that fall above the low high boundary All statistics that fall above this boundary are charged the same high usage rate A base rate can also be set The base rate is a flat fee that is charged at every billing period keyed to one or more FCOSs To give volume discounts specify a lower amount for the high usage rate than for the low usage rate To penalize heavy usage specify a higher value for the high rate To charge a standard rate enter a zero as the boundary Full Screen Interface If you are using the full screen interface you enter all billing rates in the same application There is an 11 page entry screen that lists every billing rate you can set The Billing Worksheet described later in this chapter has its parameters arranged in the order of the Adjust Billing Rates entry screens You use function keys for
91. a displayed report Ctrl S Resume scrolling a displayed report Ctrl Q Return to the NuPoint Voice application when a prompt is Ctrl D or displayed type exit Return to the Reports Menu if you paused the display Q return or Esc Esc return Preparing for a Configuration Session e Before you begin a configuration session you need the following e The Reference and Configuration Manual e A NuPoint Messenger server console video monitor and keyboard and NuPoint Voice module with power on e At least two telephones for configuration testing e A blank 3 5 inch diskette on which you can copy your configuration e Completed worksheets blank worksheets are included in Volume 2 1 Using NuPoint Voice Software The NuPoint Messenger server the server is a set of hardware and software used for adaptive information processing When you configure your software you need to choose one or more applications then configure a number of modifiers common to all of the applications Each application is discussed in its own chapter The modifiers are discussed in this chapter and following chapters where applicable When one of the modifiers operates differently in one application compared to the others this is highlighted in the application chapter Configuration is the process of organizing application and modifier data on worksheets then entering the data at a server console This data is stored in a configuration file on th
92. aches this limit or the server detects silence the server stops recording and announces that the recording is complete Enter Minutes from 0 to 60 0 prevents any messages a period means no limit Default 5 0 minutes Maximum Login Time Sets how long in minutes a user can remain logged in to the mailbox in a single session At the end of this time the server automatically logs the user out Enter Minutes from 0 to 50 0 or a period means no limit Default 0 Tips amp Techniques The average length of call sessions affects the number of ports required per line group Maximum NP View Inactivity Timeout Sets how long a clent user can set the inactivity timeout within NP View For more information see the guides for NP View administrators and users Enter Minutes from 1 to 59 to reset to the default enter a period Default 59 minutes Network Queue Message Count Limits how many messages a user can make or give for remote delivery For more information see the WP Net Digital Networking Manual Enter Number between 1 and 99 to reset to the default enter a period Default 73 Maximum Attachments per Message Limits the number of messages that the user can attach when making or giving a message copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 112 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Enter Number between 1 and 72 to reset to the default enter a period Default 7
93. addition the NuPoint Voice application automatically appends an H hang up command to the end of the string This allows the PBX to drop the call if the caller hangs up before the NuPoint Messenger server completes the transfer to the attendant If your PBX does not allow blind transfers to the attendant add a G the code for wait for a greeting to the end of the system attendant s extension If the PBX allows trunk to trunk transfer you can program an off site system attendant s extension number Each mailbox can be programmed to direct calls to an intermediate attendant when the caller requires assistance In the absence of an intermediate attendant calls are routed to the system attendant Transfer to an attendant can occur in the following situations 1 When the Key_0 for Attendant Transfer During Greeting parameter is enabled a caller can press 0 while listening either to the server greeting or to a mailbox greeting When 0 is pressed during the server greeting the caller is transferred to the system attendant s extension When 0 is pressed during a mailbox greeting the server first checks the mailbox for the attendant s extension number if none is present the caller is transferred to the system attendant s extension 2 While logged in a mailbox owner can press 0 to be transferred to an attendant if the mailbox s FCOS includes feature bit 002 Can Reach Mailbox Attendant The server first checks the mailbox for
94. age Report FAX GROUP USAGE 15min REPORT Fri Apr 21 1995 9 12 am copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 168 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 04 17 95 S8hr 17hr minutes interval Fax Group 1 DAY 01 HOUR 08 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL BUSY Transactions 0 0 0 0 0 Total Use 0 0 0 0 0 No Resource Count 0 0 0 0 0 ATB Seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 ATB Count 0 0 0 0 0 DAY 01 HOUR 09 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL BUSY Transactions 2 1 0 0 3 Total Use 102 51 0 0 153 No Resource Count 0 0 0 0 0 ATB Seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 ATB Count 0 0 0 0 0 DAY 01 HOUR 10 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL BUSY Transactions 0 0 0 2 2 Total Use 0 0 0 85 85 No Resource Count 0 0 0 0 0 ATB Seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 ATB Count 0 0 0 0 0 HIGHEST ATB_SEC 0 sec at 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 hr LOWEST ATB_SEC 0 sec at 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 hr Reading the Fax Group Usage Report The report heading shows the date and time that the report was run The first line of the report shows the date and time interval during which the data were gathered This line is repeated for each day in the report DAY 01 HOUR 08 The data displayed immediately below refer to 8 a m Monday for example 00 14 indicates that data in that column were gathered during the first fifteen minutes of the hour 15 29 refers to the second 15 minutes of the hour and so on TRANSACTIONS The number of fax connec
95. age length for network messages sent Message length for network messages sent urgent Message length for network messages received Message length for urgent network received Message length for number of network nodes sent Message length for number of network nodes sent urgent Message length for number of remote recipients sent Message length for number of remote recipients sent urgent copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 154 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Network rates Network messages sent applicable ifthe NP Network urgent messages sent Net optional feature is Number of network nodes sent to installed Number of network nodes sent urgent to Number of remote network recipients sent to Number of remote network recipients sent urgent to Network messages received Network urgent messages received Message length for network messages sent Message length for network messages sent urgent Message length for network messages received Message length for urgent network messages received Message length for number of network nodes sent Message length for number of network nodes sent urgent Message length for number of remote recipients sent Message length for number of remote recipients sent urgent Pager Calls Successful pages issued 12 Reports This chapter describes NuPoint Messenger server reports available to you These types of reports are covered System Erro
96. ailbox Mailbox that does not allow callers to leave a message GCOS Group Class of Service a method of restricting communication between mailboxes By assigning a GCOS to a each mailbox the Administrator determines which users can exchange messages There are two types affinity GCOS and bitmapped GCOS An affinity GCOS consists only of a GCOS number whereas a bitmapped GCOS is a set of groups A bitmapped GCOS can have from 0 to 128 groups Group A component of a bitmapped GCOS A single group has no intrinsic meaning it simply acts as an on off switch within a bitmapped GCOS You cannot assign an individual group to a mailbox Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 202 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 you must assign a group to a bitmapped GCOS Guest mailbox A temporary mailbox set up by a subscriber for guests Used in the hotel motel environment Hard play prompt An instruction from the NuPoint Voice application that cannot be interrupted by pressing a key on the telephone keypad The keypress must send a DTMF tone to NuPoint Voice before it will interrupt the instruction See also Prompts Idle mailbox A mailbox that has been created and assigned but which has not yet been logged into Integration Hardware and software used to interface the server with a specific PBX or switch Allows the NuPoint Voice application to know what telephone number was originally dialed for example In
97. ailed instructions about the Event Recorder see the NuPoint Messenger Installation and Service Manual Briefly you test paging by leaving a message in the mailbox then contacting the user to be sure that the page was successful You can use the Lights Test option from the server maintenance console to test each display or tone pager mailbox See the task list for procedures Volume 2 of this manual Testing Alternate Pager Activation If you have configured an alternate pager it is activated after the frequency and interval of the primary pager have expired but before the message has been played After testing the primary pager repeat the test for the alternate pager dial strings See the task list for procedures Volume 2 of this manual Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 61 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Testing Message Delivery For message delivery the server should call the appropriate telephone number and when the call is answered should prompt Hello user s name You have unplayed message s in your mailbox Please enter your passcode If the first part of the greeting has been cut off add more plus signs to the end of the pager number or post pager number Conversely if the user answers and there is a long silence before the server plays the greeting decrease the number of plus signs at the end of the pager number or post pager number Message delivery calls can be tested
98. aiting indicators Without message delivery they might have to call in many times a day to receive messages in a timely manner Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 38 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Message delivery has these features e Message delivery can be activated for specific types of messages e Users can specify the hours available for message delivery e Users can enter the number to be called e Limits for message delivery can be set through the LCOS e The server can track number of messages delivered for billing purposes e Message delivery calls can be billed to a mailbox owner s credit card or other billing account Call Placement Call placement formerly known as off system messaging allows server users to send messages to the telephones of people who are not server users that is who do not have mailboxes For example users can send messages when their time at a phone is limited at a pay phone for example and expect the other party to receive their information A company can send a product announcement to many target customers at once or a volunteer group can notify its members of a meeting time change Any mailbox owner can have this feature if you configure the mailbox properly Call placement provides voice message delivery by dialing a telephone number entered by the caller When the phone is answered the server says Hello recipient s name You have a call
99. al by Name Considerations Even though mailbox owners may all be in the same Dial by Name database they can only reach others in the database if they share either the same affinity group or if their bitmapped GCOSs have any of the same groups For example Jane Doe Lee Bau and John Smith are all in the Dial by Name database but Jane s mailbox and Lee s mailbox are configured with GCOS 1 a bitmapped GCOS and John s mailbox is configured with GCOS 65 an affinity group GCOS Jane and Lee can reach each other but not John This grouping sometimes called Partitioned Dial by Name is illustrated in Figure 8 5 Figure 8 5 Grouping Within the Dial by Name Database Jane and Lee can be in different bitmapped GCOSs but can still communicate if both GCOSs include each of their group numbers Recommendations for Degrees of Flexibility By default GCOS 1 has all 128 groups defined giving a mailbox with this GCOS the maximum flexibility in exchanging messages It is recommended that you do not alter this GCOS It is also recommended that you create GCOS 2 but define no groups for it This empty GCOS is useful in restricting the capabilities of a mailbox It is also used to enable one way communication as described below One Way Communication Using an Empty GCOS Though you can prevent contact between users you can allow them to receive certain kinds of messages using an empty GCOS For example you probably want to notify user
100. and callers in a mailbox and stored by the server Message delivery A message waiting indication that places a telephone call to a user asks for a passcode and plays the user s messages Message of the day The message of the day is actually a greeting Mailbox users hear it when they log in It is stored in the Attendant s mailbox Message Waiting I ndication I ndicator See MWI Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 204 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Message waiting type A number used to indicate which form of MWI is being used by a particular mailbox Modifier NuPoint Voice characteristics common to all applications Changing them alters the behavior of the application Example Dialing plan Module An individual processor CPU and attached components on a server The server can have between one and four modules Modules are sometimes called hosts MWI Message waiting indication indicator a way to inform users of new messages Examples include pagers and message waiting lights There are 3 message waiting indication parameters for each mailbox and each can have both a primary MWI and an alternate MWI NCOS Network Class of Service a mailbox option that controls access to network features Examples include the ability to send receive or give messages across the network and access to urgent or batch queues when sending messages New user tutorial See Standard t
101. and nested distribution lists If the number of recipients exceeds this limit 7 the system sends the message to only the first recipients Enter Number of recipients from 0 to 65535 0 is the same as 65535 Default 200 Max Number of Distribution Lists Sets the maximum number of distribution lists allowed in a mailbox Enter Number of lists from 0 to 99 0 is the same as 99 Default 99 Min Number of Recipients for Receipt Summary Sets the minimum number of recipients needed to activate a receipt summary The system then plays receipts in this order for undelivered messages unplayed messages then played messages Enter Number of recipients from 0 to 65535 Default 0 no recipients Minimum Billed Number Length Sets the minimum number of digits in a dial string to activate billing for outdials Enter Number of digits from 0 through 25 Default 0 digits Interactions amp Limitations You must also specify a billed outdial index and a billing number If the outdial dial string is shorter than this parameter the server uses the unbilled outdial index and does not charge for the outdial or use a specified long distance carrier Max Hours to Wait for Reply From NIB Not used copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 116 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Call Placement Menu Includes parameters related to call placement RNA Retry Limit Sets how many times the server tries to
102. andard tutorial which gives basic instructions to a mailbox owner on how to set up a new mailbox is automatically enabled when a mailbox is created The standard tutorial is not available however if NP TDD is enabled When the tutorial is accessed the first time on a new copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 92 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 mailbox it directs the new owner to record a name and greeting and to set a passcode There are times when mailbox owners do not want to hear the tutorial for example if they are setting up a series of tree mailboxes for directory assistance The Set Passcode Tutorial option from the Mailbox Maintenance menu is used to disable or enable a standard tutorial when desired Instead of the standard tutorial customized information tailored to an individual installation can be recorded in the attendant s mailbox and played for new mailbox owners This is a site tutorial a greeting typically recorded by a server administrator Unplayed Messages and Message Receipts The server offers customers message processing flexibility in two related areas e Defining unplayed messages e Controlling when the server sends receipts Unplayed Messages Feature bit 145 Message stays in original queue determines how the server classifies a message if a mailbox owner does not explicitly keep a message by pressing K or discard it by pressing D Message Receipts Featur
103. anges you make to it take effect immediately The inactive configuration is the online configuration that is in reserve and this option should be used when you also make changes in the offline configuration Then activate the configuration to implement all the changes you made both online inactive and offline Line Groups A line group is a set of one or more incoming telephone lines which come into line card ports on the server hardware Each application you use must be assigned to its own line group except for NP Receptionist and NuPoint Agent Any of the various operations involving outdials can however use the same line group assigned to the Pager application Most of the modifications you may want to make to an application are made to its line group Dialing Plan To configure each application you must define its dialing plan which is the structure of how the mailboxes are numbered Related features include which key a user presses to speak to a system attendant or to use call placement Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Day and Night Hours This feature of the NuPoint Voice application lets you set the work schedule both office hours and which days are handled as weekends This also handles certain situations such as a user wishing to speak to a system attendant Mailboxes Every user of the server needs a mailbox and all applications require mailbox
104. angs up automatically when dialing a pager Voice Pager Code in the Dial String A V Voice Pager anywhere in the dial string causes the server to play the first unplayed message only If there is more than one message in the mailbox the user is paged again almost immediately and the next unplayed message is played Greet Code in the Dial String When the server is configured to outdial a telephone number and the number is followed by a G Greet code the clicks and pops of particularly noisy switching equipment could be misinterpreted as a greeting You can usually avoid this by inserting a before the Greet code for example T9T5551212 G If this still does not prevent the misinterpretation dial the telephone number then count the number of seconds that it takes for the pager to answer Insert the appropriate number of plus signs between the number and the G For example if the dial string is T9T555121 2G and it takes the pager five seconds to answer change the string to T9T55512124 4 4 G Answer Supervision Code in the Dial String e You can use the Answer Supervision L code if you have analog phone lines This is a good alternative to the Greet G code because answer supervision can increase reliability and lower connect time e Answer supervision time out controls how many seconds the line card waits until issuing a Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 52 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Doc
105. aphs describe entries you can make on the worksheet Identify the RCOS by a number from 1 through 64 and enter this number in the RCOS to modify box of the worksheet Also you have the option of naming the RCOS to easily identify it you can enter up to 15 characters in the RCOS name box on the worksheet Configuration Requirements for System Wide Parameters Enter the system wide parameters in the System Wide Parameters portion of the RCOS worksheet The starting and ending digit positions of the NPA and NXX are RCOS parameters that apply to all RCOSs in the system You can change starting and ending digit positions of course but any changes apply to all RCOSs that might be configured You must define the starting and ending digit positions for the NPA and NXX The counting of the digit position starts from the right When specifying digit positions be aware that the system counts the positions from right to left This right to left counting operates in the screening as shown in Figure 8 7 Figure 8 7 Counting Digit Positions copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 129 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Configuration Requirements for RCOS Specific Parameters In addition to the RCOS number and name you can set and modify RCOS specific parameters for each of the 64 RCOSs making calling capabilities variable for different mailboxes These parameters are discussed in the following parag
106. aps which help you reach a menu or see which task to perform next Which Document Do I Use Topics listed below are described in NuPoint Messenger documents as indicated This table lists documents for the base hardware and software only not optional features Reference Diagnostics Technical and Manual Reference Configuration Model 640 Manual Manual Notice to Installation Installer and Service Topics Manual configuration Administration by Phone Ni Billing NI Call placement W Activating an inactive N Card configuration W K Card replacement V O Defining a line group Wooo Diagnostics m L vy DID NuPoint Voice y application y vy L Hs Disk replacement V Distribution lists W Duplicating a configuration W Error Log messages Event Recorder messages ooo ee FCOSs and feature bits W Floppy backup and restore y FPSA NI GCOSs and groups NI Glossary W Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Greetings W Hardware changes y y Hardware descriptions W Installation procedures y y LCOSs and limits Mailboxes Le je je Message delivery Message waiting lights Paging Passcode mailbox 2 Password
107. are sent out for every new unplayed message or only when the message waiting indicator state changes from off to on or from on to off Using the latter functionality only when the message waiting indicator state changes makes better use of server resources The server does not suppress message waiting indicator updates by default To suppress them you must enter the message waiting type number of your RS 232 system then enter Yes The default is No for all types Message waiting types are listed in Table 5 4 Modem Result Code The modem result code parameter allows the server to determine if a message waiting request was accepted by the switch and to retry a failed request if necessary The modem result code tells the server to look for a certain message from the modem to indicate that the message waiting request was accepted by the switch You must know the message that the modem returns for example NO CARRIER The server looks for the exact message set in the Modem Result Code field and if it does not see it retries the message waiting request up to 18 times You can find out what result code the modem returns by setting this field to some value it doesn t matter what and then turning on the Pager Programmable RS232 interface in Event Recorder Use the Lights Test to send an MWI request to a mailbox that has its MWI type set to Programmable RS232 The Event Recorder message will show you the actual result string that is returne
108. arent mailboxes must contain a distribution list so that the server knows how to route users and callers Parent mailboxes can be broadcast rotational or tree mailboxes Passcode See Mailbox passcode Password A server security feature consisting of an alphanumeric code required during login to verify a user s access to server menus See also mailbox passcode PBX Private Branch Exchange a business telephone system usually on premises that switches calls from public telephone network to stations in the system Permission category When FPSA is activated one of five levels of access that the server superuser assigns to NuPoint Voice superusers and console users At least one category is associated with a user ID and every server menu Phoneline exceptions LEs Parameters that tell the NuPoint Voice application how to handle phone lines in terms of dialing speed voltages etc Play message To listen to a voice message Played message A message which the user has heard and decides to keep PMS Property Management System Integrated with a server allows mailbox creation directly from the PMS Port A physical hardware connection A server port is the physical telephone line connection to the server Also see Serial port Post pager number A dial string used to control a pager either to display a set of numbers or to enter special codes Used with the outdial index and the pager number all three of which are stored in t
109. as an internal outdial index billed outdial index or unbilled outdial index and specify the access code index when adding a pager message delivery call placement or fax retrieval to a mailbox Message delivery also requires the server features that make it possible for the user to log into a mailbox and to interact with the server Call placement also requires e Server features that make it possible for the user to send messages to outside telephone numbers e Modification of the NuPoint Voice line group s dialing plan Mailbox Configuration Data Paging message delivery and call placement require this information in the user s mailbox configuration e Aproperly modified FCOS e A properly modified LCOS e The outdial indexes which point to a specific pager system e The pager access type which points to an internal outdial index billed outdial index or unbilled outdial index Both paging and message delivery need this information e The pager number the telephone number that the server outdials to e The pager frequency the number of times that the server attempts to notify the user of an unplayed message e The pager interval the number of minutes the server waits between repages Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 40 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 For paging you also need The post pager number used with display pagers Once the server has reached the page
110. asionally you may need the same digit for a Dial by Name trigger and in a mailbox number With the optional star prefix dialing plan described above the digit specified for Dial by Name can still be used for mailbox numbers when the digit is not followed by a star Suppose for example that your server has mailboxes beginning with 1 but you also need the digit 1 for Dial by Name You can specify 1 as the Dial by Name dialing plan digit which causes the server to prompt the caller to press 1 and to dial by name Transfers and Attendants The NuPoint Voice application allows you to specify dial strings and methods for transferring callers and to specify the use of a wait prompt If the NP Receptionist optional feature is installed you can specify the conditions for a company greeting and mailbox greeting Attendant s Transfer String and System Attendant s Extension These two dial strings together describe the steps needed to transfer a call to a live attendant or other general assistance number These steps are PBX dependent and can be determined by actually transferring a call to the attendant from a station set Use the dial string characters in Table 2 7 The attendant s transfer string contains the coding for all the steps that the PBX must take before dialing the attendant s extension number The default attendant s transfer string is S which means do a switch hook flash then pause for one second This string is a
111. at the destination number the server announces This is a message for recipients name from Sender s name Recipients then have the following options from the keypad e Accept this message e Delay the message for 30 seconds e Reject this message e Tell the server to try to redeliver in an hour Note All options require recipients to have a pushbutton phone If recipients accept the message they can replay it and or answer the sender If recipients reject the message or the server cannot deliver it the server notifies the sender with a non delivery receipt even if the sender did not request a receipt Of course users can still request the standard receipt Passcode Protection As a message addressing option users can attach a 4 to 10 digit passcode to their messages which recipients must enter before they can play the messages Of course a sender and recipient must agree on this passcode beforehand To use this feature a user presses M for message addressing options when making the message for a call placement number The user then presses O for off site passcode and is prompted for a 4 to 10 digit passcode The user then exits message addressing options and sends the message The called person is prompted for the passcode before the message can be played Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 65 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 5 Message Waiting Application This c
112. ate the mailbox before it can be used The mailbox number you select must be allowed by the Dialing Plan Note For server security you should change the attendant s mailbox number from the default See Mailboxes in the task list for attendant s mailbox procedures Volume 2 of this manual The attendant s mailbox also has special privileges e lts greeting is the message of the day This message is heard by all mailbox owners whose FCOSs include feature bit 043 immediately after they log in The message is played twice after two separate logins the first time hard played and the second time soft played Hard played prompts cannot be interrupted soft played prompts can e The message of the day is stored only in the attendant s mailbox Once it has been deleted no mailbox owners hear the message even if they have not logged in since the last message was created Conversely if an old message of the day is not deleted or replaced by a new message all newly created mailboxes receive the outdated message For procedures on enabling and disabling the message of the day see NuPoint Voice Application in the task list Volume 2 of this manual e A customized site tutorial greeting can also be recorded from the attendant s mailbox When the system administrator presses G to record a company greeting the server prompts Press M to record the message of the day press T to record a site tutorial See NuPoint Voice
113. ation can be programmed to ignore or absorb these extra digits The digits are absorbed in the order received For example if Digits Absorbed 2 the software absorbs ignores the first two digits that it receives See examples 1 and 2 at the end of this discussion for a more complete illustration of this operation On the DID NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet enter the number of digits supplied by the CO to this DID trunk group that are to be ignored or absorbed 1 through 9 digits Offset Ideally the digits that the server receives from the CO should match the mailbox number If this is not possible the server must map these digits or convert them into the corresponding mailbox numbers One method of doing this is to absorb digits as mentioned above Another option which can be combined with the absorption of digits is to add a signed offset number e To subtract from prefix digits use a minus offset e To add to prefix digits use a offset e Use offset 0 to pass digits through unchanged The process of mapping DID received digits into mailbox numbers can be seen in the following examples Figure 3 2 Sample DI D NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet Example 1 Assume Digits expected 4 Digits absorbed 1 Offset 100 This means that any set of four digits as received on DID maps as follows 3275 digits received on DID 275 absorb one digit 100 add signed offset 175 mailbox number
114. ations Expression Interpretation AG All the line cards controlled by module 1 on a multi module server for a single module server this means all ports on line card 1 1 27 All ports controlled by module 1 line card 2 1 0 3 7 Module 1 all ports on line cards 1 3 assuming 8 port cards bx 2 2 2 0 2 3 7 Module 2 line card 1 port 2 plus all ports on line cards 2 and 3 assuming 8 port cards Configuring the Application Configuring the NuPoint Voice application consists of establishing day and night hours establishing a mailbox dialing plan specifying call transfers and the use of attendants and identifying administrator s and attendant s mailboxes You must also decide whether to configure other operations such as a wait prompt the default language for prompts and passcodes Day and Night Hours The NuPoint Voice application can issue different company greetings for day answering and night weekend answering With the NP Receptionist optional feature the software can treat individual extensions differently when calls are received during night and weekend hours rather than during normal business hours The hours that constitute a normal work day and the days of the week that are considered a weekend can be customized for the individual installation The company greeting is the greeting in the administrator s mailbox Day and night hours are scheduled for each line group If you have different day and
115. ator s mailbox you can create and modify master lists from 1 to 99 just like a mailbox owner s personal lists Administrators mailboxes do not have user mailbox owner distribution lists only master lists Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 90 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Other Mailbox Configuration Parameters Along with other parameters in a mailbox configuration you can also specify a message waiting type that determines how mailbox owners are notified when unplayed messages arrive in their mailboxes Mailboxes can also be configured for paging and message delivery Refer to the Pager Application chapter for more information on these topics Mailboxes can be password protected Variable Length Mailbox Numbers The variable length mailbox number capability allows the server administrator greater flexibility when assigning mailbox numbers You can configure a dialing plan to allow variable length mailbox numbers Code a V in the desired digit position in the dialing plan as described in the NuPoint Voice Application chapter under Mailbox Dialing Plan Without this capability all mailboxes in the same line group that begin with the same digit must be the same length If for example you specify 3 as the mailbox number length for mailboxes beginning with 1 then all 1 series mailboxes must be three digits long 100 101 102 199 etc This means you have only 100 mailboxes avai
116. atterns None Exact match numbers Disallow Exact match number patterns None NPA screening Disallow NXX screening Disallow Sequence of NPA NXX Screening Without NPA NXX call screening the system restricts outdials only by the number of digits to be dialed With NPA NXX call screening the system restricts the outdial capabilities for a mailbox by allowing calls to be made only to certain area codes or to certain prefixes within an area code The system prioritizes the screening process in the following manner 1 Removes the absorption digits numbers at the beginning of the dial string that allow access to outside lines from the dialing string prior to the screening process These numbers were entered in the Digit Absorption Table one of the RCOS menus 2 Compares the number called to the Exact Match Table one of the RCOS menus which specifies whether the number is allowed or disallowed Table 8 9 shows the screening method 3 Counts the remaining number of digits If the dial string does not contain an NPA area code it adds the home NPA 4 Ifthe system does not receive an exact match for the dial string it then continues with the NPA NXX screening 5 Passes the NPA to the NPA Table one of the RCOS menus and determines if the area code is allowed or disallowed Table 8 10 shows the screening method 6 Ifthe NPA contains an NXX Table another RCOS menu the system disregards the selection of the allow or disallow stat
117. ave to select or enter any information for that parameter during reconfiguration Configuration Types The NuPoint Voice application has two different kinds of configuration online and offline The Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 13 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet is divided into these two types to help you enter settings into the console in the right order Offline configuration handles server settings that cannot be changed immediately such as setting up line groups Online configuration includes the remainder of server settings that can be modified at any time Many offline and online configuration settings work together so there are two kinds of online configuration the active and the inactive configuration The active configuration is the online configuration currently in use and any changes you make to it take effect immediately after exiting the menus The nactive configuration is the online configuration that is in reserve changes made to it do not take effect until you perform an additional step This option should be used when you also make changes in the offline configuration Then you activate the configuration to implement all the changes you made both online inactive and offline Figure 2 1 shows the relationship between the different configuration types Figure 2 1 Handling Configuration Types Figure 2 2 Sample NuPoint Voice Application W
118. box Greeting Dial String Similarly this is the string of activities that the server executes before playing out a mailbox greeting In some telephone offices the forwarding and answer is so fast that it is disconcerting to some callers Putting a sign in this position causes the server to wait a second after answering before playing the greeting For more information see the NuPoint Voice Application chapter System Attendant s Extension Optional The DID NuPoint Voice application supports Return to Operator for DID line groups The system attendant s extension is used to process the call being returned to the operator In most cases DID NuPoint Voice does not use a system attendant s mailbox extension or dial string This is because only some COs support this feature If your CO does support Return to Operator then you should also configure the Key_0 for Attendant Transfer During Greeting parameter and the Attendant s Transfer String parameter when setting up this application See the NuPoint Voice Application chapter for more information on these parameters Wait Prompt The Wait prompt operates in DID NuPoint Voice the same as in NuPoint Voice See the NuPoint Voice Application chapter for more information Administrator s and Attendant s Mailboxes For most DID applications it is appropriate to remove these mailboxes If you do use them however the following information applies The default mailbox file contains
119. boxes The Mailboxes With Activity entry in this report shows the number of mailboxes that have either been logged into or received a message Figure 12 32 Sample Idle Mailbox Report MAILBOX STATISTICS Fri Jun 16 13 39 28 1995 The following mailboxes have NEVER logged in 22 998 1111 2606 2630 2632 2636 2647 2648 2658 2663 2665 2675 2676 2677 2678 2680 3053 3087 3088 3089 6635 6644 6829 6859 7000 8464 8468 8472 80000 6875734 MAILBOX STATISTICS since System was created 518 Mailboxes included in this report 195 Mailboxes with activity 185 Mailboxes have never logged in copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 191 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 333 Mailboxes have logged in 12 Mailboxes with pagers 248 Total calls to pagers 20 0 Average calls to pagers per subsriber 0 Wakeup messages received 10727 Total messages deposited 3868 Total greets played 4462 Total logins 0 logins by mobile phones 4462 logins by landline phones 11633 0 User connect time minutes 2539 9 Caller connect time minutes 810533 5 Disk usage minute _size hours_ kept 2 6 Average user connect time 0 6 Average caller connect time MAILBOXES BY FCOS FCOS Mailboxes 1 8 6 I 61 2 62 10 63 5 100 1 MAILBOXES BY LCOS LCOS Mailboxes 1 517 2 1 MAILBOXES BY DEPARTMENT CODE Department Code Mailboxes New Since Last Gather No code 280 280 eng 104 104 mfg 8 8 marketing 16 16 sales 18 18 te
120. boxes for more information If the administrator s or the attendant s mailbox is desired and is set to a number other than the default you must create the mailbox before using it Identifying the mailbox numbers in the DID NuPoint Voice application gives the mailboxes the ability to perform their special functions but the functions are not enabled until the mailboxes are configured The recommended FCOS for both mailboxes is 10 VIP the LCOS is 1 Default the GCOS is 1 and the message waiting type should be whatever is available for your server Testing After phone lines have been installed and you have completed all the applicable steps discussed so far test your DID NuPoint Voice application In addition to the testing tips listed in the following paragraphs see the task list for the procedure in Volume 2 of this manual e For test purposes standard single line telephones perfectly mimic a CO a rotary dial telephone mimics dial pulse signaling and a pushbutton phone generates the DTMF of tone trunks Unplugging a CO line makes the line neither idle nor busy to the CO The CO s automatic testing eventually discovers the unplugged line and takes it out of service You must then call the telephone company and have them reactivate the line manually unless the local phone company has configured the trunk group for auto restore Whenever possible it is better to make a line busy to the CO than to unplug it Make a line busy by r
121. by department If the mailbox uses a department code the software supports up to 2000 department codes When you need to organize information for large groups of mailboxes you can use a Mailbox Group Worksheet Figure 6 5 This worksheet allows you to enter configuration values for several mailboxes on a single sheet Use it in conjunction with the Mailbox Individual Worksheet when appropriate A blank Mailbox Group Worksheet is located in Volume 2 of this manual Classes of Service Each mailbox is assigned classes of service A Feature Class of Service FCOS is a collection of mailbox features options and abilities called feature bits A Limits Class of Service LCOS is a group of mailbox limits such as how many messages a user can store The LCOS also determines the mailbox prompts language A Group Class of Service GCOS determines which mailboxes can communicate with each other A Restriction Class of Service RCOS establishes a calling area for a mailbox that is subject to NPA NXX call screening For further information on FCOSs and feature bits see the Features Class of Service chapter For information on LCOSs and limits GCOSs and groups and RCOSs refer to the Other Classes of Service chapter Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 85 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 A Network Class of Service NCOS and Tenant Class of Service TCOS parts of optional features can also be assigned to mailb
122. ce if you limit messages sent to mailboxes to a maximum of five minutes and limit call placement messages to two minutes the server enforces the two minute limit for both kinds of messages For more information on LCOSs and limits see the Other Classes of Service chapter Call Placement Pager Access Type This parameter identifies whether call placement calls are to be internal billed or unbilled The call placement pager access type points to the corresponding internal outdial index I billed outdial index B or unbilled outdial index U specified earlier in the originating mailbox Users cannot alter this index from the keypad The indexes refer to the same set of access codes used for standard paging This means you might be able to use the same indexes as those already set up for paging The server prompts you to enter a call placement pager access type after it prompts you for message waiting types For more information on creating access codes see Configuring a Dial String earlier in this chapter Pager Application Examples This section shows examples of how to program the pager application for paging message delivery and call placement Paging Examples Pager Dial Strings Dial strings for pagers can be divided into several parts Outside Access Code This code allows access to the public switched network For PBXs this is normally 9 Pager Company Telephone Number This is a 7 or 11 digit telephone number
123. ce application is a software application that uses the DID lines to answer a call with the mailbox owner s personal greeting In other words the DID NuPoint Voice application gives the server the ability to manipulate and translate the digits received from the Central Office CO Each voice mailbox owner has either a four digit telephone number or seven digit telephone number depending on the digits received from the CO Calling that number causes the telephone company s central office to seize one of the several DID lines connecting the CO to the NuPoint Messenger server and to dial some or all of those digits into the server The server matches the dialed number to the appropriate mailbox and answers with the personal greeting of the mailbox owner DID mailboxes allow callers to dial a telephone number that is answered with the mailbox greeting While some servers can use the PBX s forwarding capability to allow the server to answer calls with the user s mailbox greeting DID mailboxes answer the calls directly To use the DID NuPoint Voice application on your server you should confirm that the line cards are set to DID settings You must also perform any necessary server level configuration Server level configuration through the DID NuPoint Voice application involves two steps defining the line group and configuring the application In the first step you assign server ports to the DID NuPoint Voice application In the second step you
124. cement and passcode protection Paging and Message Delivery Telephone I nterface Users control their schedules and phone numbers by beginning at the Call Schedule Options Menu an option on the User Options Menu From there they go to the Paging Message Delivery Schedule Menu where they can alter the start and stop times and phone numbers copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 64 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Note When NP TDD is enabled call scheduling is not available When users make a choice from the Paging Message Delivery Schedule the server gives them a series of prompts to guide them through each change they make Whether users hear the prompts for paging or message delivery depends on the FCOS and whether the Message Delivery parameter was set to Y in the mailbox configuration Call Placement Telephone Interface To use this feature users begin with these steps 1 Press M to start making a message 2 Press the key set in the dialing plan that activates call placement 3 Dial the destination phone number The server automatically prompts users to record the name of a recipient and then to record a message After recording users can send their messages immediately with normal delivery or use message addressing options including passcode protection see below When users send their messages the server dials the specified phone number When someone answers the phone
125. center application The pre company name dial string forces NP Receptionist to drop the call and instructs the server to wait a designated number of seconds before playing the company greeting There is no pre programmed default e The pre company name dial string must include a pound sign You can configure DTMF A fourth column DTMF key in place of the pound sign if the PBX recognizes the pound tone as a code for some other function The port that answers the call issues this tone which forces NP Receptionist to release the call Be aware that callers and mailbox owners always hear this dial string when a mailbox is reached through the NuPoint Voice application e To give the PBX time to make the connection before the company greeting is played program a series of plus signs after the or A Each in the NuPoint Voice application configuration means wait one second To determine how many pluses are needed forward one station to another station make a test call to the first station then count the number of seconds that elapse before the second station rings e Ifthe test call showed that it takes two seconds for a forwarded call to connect to the second extension for example use for the pre company name dial string e You can experiment to find the optimum number of seconds to wait for call connection If the first half of the message center greeting does not play when NP Receptionist calls are forwarded add m
126. code trip count can be set to any value from 0 to 255 The passcode trip period can range from 0 to 240 hours In both cases zero means the passcode break in warning function is disabled The passcode break in warning function is enabled when you configure both a trip count and trip period Using the NuPoint Voice Application This section covers the final steps toward using the NuPoint Voice application Activate Changes After the necessary configuring has been completed and you have returned to the Main Menu the NuPoint Messenger server makes all active configuration online changes effective immediately Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 27 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 WARNING Activating the inactive configuration causes the server to restart all tasks resulting in an interruption to call processing You should perform the next step only during periods of low call traffic To make offline and inactive online configuration changes take effect activate the inactive configuration When you activate the inactive configuration the server automatically shuts down and resets the software to the new configuration then returns to the NuPoint Voice Active Configuration Menu Create Mailboxes The final step for making NuPoint Voice operational is to create mailboxes Refer to the Mailboxes chapter for more information If the administrator s or the attendant s mailbox is set to a
127. console Ta Phoneline exceptions W Power information y Prompts RCOSs NPA NXX Release Notes y Repairing a server Replacing a server Reports Resource Manager Service procedures Site preparation Ni 7 l Ni J System administration y a 7 Ni J Ni EHHH System maintenance System security A System verify Testing a configuration 2a pii H Troubleshooting Updating y Upgrading y Verifying configuration parameters NuPoint Voice application W Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 What If Information Is Missing If information you need is not available in the documents listed above go to these documents e Release Notes e Other documents as applicable How Do I Obtain the Documents Need To obtain other documents contact your distributor Conventions Used in This Manual The procedures located in Volume 2 use certain conventions to describe how you enter configuration data and to indicate information displayed at the server maintenance console Press Enter Press the Enter key For example Press Enter if the current number is correct On some keyboards this key is labeled Return or has a return arrow Enter Type the text shown then press the Enter key For example Enter the line number 1 24 mean
128. cording to the busy frequency and busy interval When the server detects that an illegal dial string that is a string that does not conform to configuration rules has been outdialed it considers the page successful This prevents the server from continually retrying the page However if a dial string is configured incorrectly that is it cannot activate the pager but conforms to pager configuration rules the server continually retries the page This is why it is critical to test every pager immediately after configuring is completed Note If you are using answer supervision the L code in any of your outdial strings your outdial is considered a failure unless the server detects a ringing on the line Billing Considerations The billing function is capable of billing both paging and message delivery on a per call basis Remember however that the server site is the calling party and thereby responsible for any charges that accrue when paging or message delivery calls are made to the outside telephone network As stated earlier pager calls are usually of very short duration but message delivery calls can be quite long Since the cost of each call depends on the time of day that it is made the duration of the call the distance between the server and the user and the rates of the local telephone company the server makes no provisions for this aspect of the billing Outdial Billing Outdials such as paging calls can however be
129. create goodwill follow this procedure 1 Initially assign FCOS 1 Unlimited to the mailbox when you create it Log into the mailbox and record a greeting that welcomes the new mailbox owner After the greeting is recorded modify the mailbox configuration to give the mailbox the correct FCOS 4 Pager Application This chapter covers e Paging Message Delivery and Call Placement e Configuration Requirements and Worksheets e Line Group Definition e Mailbox Configuration e Examples e Testing the Configuration e Billing Issues Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 36 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 e The User Interface Overview The Pager application causes the NuPoint Messenger server to initiate rather than receive a telephone call Don t let the name Pager application confuse you It is used for paging but also for a number of other functions that require outdials An outdial is a call placed by the server Two other uses of this application are message delivery and call placement Some optional features such as NuPoint Fax and Cut through Paging use the Pager application as well Paging is a function that allows the server to notify a mailbox owner when a message arrives in the mailbox by activating a radio pager Parameters can be set to limit the hours that a page may be sent or the types of messages that activate a page For information on Cut through Paging see the
130. ct The connect criteria that is the conditions under which the server should consider the trunk call to be successful C Cut through R Ring T Tone dial or modem Failure The action taken when the connect criteria for trunk calls are not met R play the default Redial menu A transfer to an assistance number M prompt the caller to leave a message in the mailbox Pre Extension Dial Strings Report Another report available to you when NP Receptionist is installed is the Pre Extension Dial Strings Report This report see sample in Figure 12 36 shows pre extension dial strings associated with each index configured for mailboxes served by NP Receptionist Figure 12 36 Sample Pre Extension Dial Strings Report gt gt gt Acme Products System lt lt lt PRE EXTENSION DIAL STRINGS Fri Apr 27 1995 9 52 am INDEX PRE DIAL STRINGS DESCRIPTION L TOT Outside line copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 195 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 2 T9T 23759 Non Dial Account List of Authorized Users You can view a list of users who have access to the server The list is displayable at a server maintenance console through the List All Users option in the Security or the FPSA Menu Figure 12 37 shows a sample list when FPSA is not running Figure 12 38 shows the output when FPSA is running Figure 12 37 Sample List of Authorized Users without FPSA User ID UID La
131. d from the modem You can then set the Modem Result Code field to that value assuming that the request was completed successfully Leave this field blank to have the server ignore any result code returned by the modem and assume that all message waiting requests are successful To remove a previously configured value enter a period Testing Create at least one mailbox with the RS 232 message waiting type that is appropriate for your server To test RS 232 message waiting indicators choose the Lights Test option from the server maintenance console and select the proper message waiting type See the task list for testing procedures Table 5 4 Message Waiting Types Number Message Waiting Type 0 None 1 Not available 2 AC message lamp 3 DTMF to PBX 4 Fixed RS 232 and Hitachi DX 5 Pager 6 SL 1 7 Program RS 232 8 Tip amp Ring RS 232 9 Centrex RS 232 10 Intecom RS 232 11 NEC RS 232 12 Video Dispatch 13 ITT RS 232 14 Text Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 15 AT amp T System 75 16 HIS PMS 17 Unified Integrations 18 ROLM 19 Mitel 20 ISL 1 Message Waiting 21 Hitachi PMS 22 SL 1 Enhanced Meridian 23 Fujitsu 960 24 SMS MWI 6 Mailboxes This chapter describes the most common component of the NuPoint Messenger server software applications the mailbox These topics are covered e Outside callers and Mai
132. d high usage rate for each of the statistics in the billing categories on the worksheet Table 11 2 Table 11 2 Billing Categories Category Statistics Calculated and Reported Mailbox accesses Logins Greets copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 153 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Base rates FCOS usage by FCOS number 1 64 only Connect time by line group Disk usage User connect time Caller connect time Call placement connect time Disk usage units other Fax disk usage length of messages x time lon disk Fax disk usage units applicable if the NuPoint Fax optional feature lis installed Messages received Network rates applicable if the NP Net optional feature is installed User messages Caller messages Call placement messages Future delivery messages Urgent messages Wakeup messages Receipt responses messages Fax received messages Fax sent messages Applicable if the NuPoint Fax retrieval messages Fax optional feature is Fax undelivered messages installed Fax pages received messages Fax pages sent messages Fax pages retrieval messages Network messages sent Network urgent messages sent Number of network nodes sent to Number of network nodes sent urgent to Number of remote network recipients sent to Number of remote network recipients sent urgent to Network messages received Network urgent messages received Mess
133. d other features that use all ten of these digits you can implement the optional star prefix dialing plan This allows additional features using digit entry followed by the star key You can implement several features with the optional dialing plan as shown in Table 2 6 Table 2 6 Optional Star Prefix Dialing Plan Capabilities Optional Dialing Plan Choices Counterpart in Regular Dialing Plan Dial by Name A Analog Networking M Networking without prefix N Networking with prefix P cal Placement T PBX Considerations A PBX only allows a certain range of extension numbers Ideally employees mailbox numbers Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 17 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 should match their extension numbers This makes it easier for callers to remember the proper mailbox number If the numbers do not match and the optional NP Receptionist program is installed you can program certain conversion factors to allow the NuPoint Voice application to match the extension with the correct mailbox number If the company has employees in the field who do not have regular PBX extension numbers you can give them mailbox numbers that do not fall in the range of allowable PBX extensions even if there are enough mailbox numbers in this range You can reserve these extra mailboxes for future expansion of in house staff For example if the PBX allows extensions 200 to 39
134. d to line groups Each line group in turn is assigned to a single application and any configuring that is done for that application applies to every port in the line group The number of ports in each line group depends on how heavy the phone traffic is expected to be for the particular application Line Group Number Each line group is represented by a discrete number Valid line group numbers are 1 through 24 Group Name The group name should identify the line group s purpose For example Pager Outdialer Line s in Group You identify each line or port in a group by a triplet which represent the module slot line card and port on a line card Module refers to a CPU the server s main processor Modules are numbered 1 through 4 Slots are numbered 0 through 15 Ports are numbered from 0 to the number of ports on the line card you can connect one telephone line to each port For more information on line groups see the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Call Placement To use call placement you must change the dialing plan Use the letter T as a dialing plan entry For example if you entered T in position 8 of the plan users would enter 8 from the keypad to activate the call placement function You can use T in any position of the dialing plan but only once Refer to the NuPoint Voice Application chapter for more information on the dialing plan You may also want to define a new pager system or dial string see th
135. de but cannot create or use distribution lists No one can make messages for or give messages to a Greeting Only mailbox A Greeting Only mailbox must have a greeting otherwise the server considers the mailbox invalid To log into a Greeting Only mailbox that does not have a greeting press the star key on the phone key pad then enter the mailbox number You may choose to remove feature bit 066 Login during greeting in Greeting Only mailbox after you record a greeting for the mailbox Guest Mailboxes A guest mailbox is one that is assigned to each guest typically in a hotel or motel You establish a guest mailbox by assigning an FCOS such as the Lodging FCOS described in the Feature Classes of Service chapter to it These mailboxes are particularly appreciated by users who might be unfamiliar with voice messaging systems and their uninitiated callers The guest does not need to do any kind of mailbox set up such as recording a name and passcode before using the mailbox The server can usually be integrated with the hotel motel telephone system to allow the user to Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 98 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 log in simply by pressing a button on the telephone and entering a passcode when prompted by the server Immediately after the guest logs in the server will play the first message automatically The guest is given the options of keeping or discarding the mes
136. depends on how heavy the phone traffic is expected to be for that particular application Line Group Each line group is represented by a distinct number Valid line group numbers are 1 through 24 Group Name The group name is optional It serves to easily identify the line group s purpose for example the line group for this application can be called DTMF to PBX Outdialer Line s in Group You identify each line or port in a group using a triplet which stand for a module the slot number for a line card and a port on the line card Module refers to a CPU the server s main processor Slot numbers are 0 through 15 Ports are numbered 0 through n the highest port number on the line card you can connect one telephone line to each port For more information on triplets and line group numbering see the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Initial Dial Tone Detection When building outdial strings the Initial Dialtone Detect parameter gives you precise control copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 68 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 This parameter allows you to include a T code Go Off Hook Wait for Dial Tone if you are integrating with most PBXs or delete a T code in the dial string if you are integrating with cellular or other non PBX equipment that cannot produce a dial tone The outdial string consists of the following parts e initial T code produced by this parameter if enabl
137. different options when adjusting Billing Rates Pages 1 and 7 of the Adjust Billing Rates entry screens are shown in Figure 11 1 The function keys you can use in the mailbox maintenance screen are Function Key Explanation F1 Display next page F2 Display previous page F3 Display first page Display last page F9 or Esc Exit the Mailbox Screen F10 Edit current mailbox s information Home Provide context sensitive help ADJUST BILLING RATES Page 1 Low Usage Rate Boundary High Usage ssages Received From Users 0 000 0 0 000 essages Received From Callers 0 000 0 0 000 essages Future Deliveries 0 000 0 0 000 Call Placement per minute Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Call Placement per call Rate 0 000 0 0 000 Urgent messages received from callers 0 000 0 0 000 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 147 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Automatic Wakeups or TAS messages 0 000 0 0 000 Receipt requests 0 000 0 0 000 Disk Usage 0 000 0 0 000 etwork Messages Sent 0 000 0 0 000 etwork Urgent Messages Sent 0 000 0 0 000 Network Messages Received 0 000 0 0 000 Network Urgent Messages Received 0 000 0 0 000 umber of Network Nodes Sent to 0 000 0 0 000 umber of Network Nodes Sent Urgent 0 000 0 0 000 Number of Remote Network Recipients 0 000 0 0 000 Number of Remote Network Recips Urg 0 000 0 0 000 F1 Nxt Pg F2 Prev Pg F3 First F4 Last F9 Cancel F10 Save Home Help Enter
138. dministrator s Mailbox You can record your name with the Name command which is also available from the User Options Menu if you want the server to greet you by name when you log in For security reasons do not name the mailbox Administrator s Mailbox Unauthorized users should not know that they have accessed a special purpose mailbox Adding a New Mailbox There are important differences between creating a mailbox on the console and adding a new mailbox by phone e No programming for NP Receptionist can be added over the phone The server does not prompt for treatment types mailbox extension numbers or attendant extension numbers When Administration by Phone prompts for a three digit class of service enter the Feature copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 132 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 class of Service FCOS The server accepts any FCOS number from 1 through 640 even if no feature bits are programmed for that FCOS No error message is issued Be sure to enter the correct Feature Class of Service e When Administration by Phone prompts for a three digit limits class of service enter the Limits Class of Service LCOS The server accepts any LCOS number from 1 through 640 Be sure that you enter the correct LCOS e You can assign any valid message waiting indication to the mailbox but you cannot add other information by phone such as paging This message waiting indication
139. does not work without extra programming You can create mailboxes that require extra programming at the server maintenance console The single exception to this rule is the AC message lamp The following section gives instructions for programming an AC message lamp address by telephone AC Message Lamp Address Codes An AC message lamp address consists of a House Code which can be any letter from A through P followed by a Unit Code which can be any number from 1 through 16 Examples are A1 D5 P16 Address P1 is reserved for troubleshooting and diagnostics and cannot be assigned to a mailbox Due to the limitations of the telephone key pad you must enter the address differently 1 House Code Numbers 2 through 9 on your telephone key pad represent three different letters each In order to specify which letter is desired the server requires that you enter two numbers to represent a house code letter the key number then the letter position from the left For example you enter K as 52 because K is on the number 5 key and at the second position from the left JKL Table 9 1 lists the AC message lamps house codes Table 9 1 AC Message Waiting Lamp House Codes Letter Enter Letter Enter A i I 43 B 22 J 51 ic 23 K 52 D 31 L 53 E 32 M 61 F 33 N 62 G 41 o 63 H 42 IP 71 2 Unit Code Since the server prompts for a four digit AC message lamp address you must
140. e group Base Rates As mentioned earlier in this chapter a base rate is a flat fee that is charged at every billing period You must set a rate for each FCOS that you want to bill You can only differentiate among the first 64 FCOSs any FCOS higher than 64 is billed at the rates for FCOS 64 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 150 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Figure 11 2 Sample Billing Worksheet Figure 11 3 Sample Billing Worksheet Connect Time There are three connect time statistics that you can bill for user connect time caller connect time and call placement connect time All these statistics are accumulated in the same way but you can have a different set of rates for each port line group in the server These statistics measure off hook to on hook phone line usage e User connect time is the time used by the mailbox owner to pick up messages and or to make messages for other mailbox owners The rates you set for user connect time apply to all calls through the specified port line group e Caller connect time is the time charged when outside callers leave messages in a mailbox or listen to the greeting of a Greeting Only mailbox The rates you set for caller connect time apply to all calls through the specified port line group e Call placement connect time is the amount of time required to place an off server call including any greeting a caller hears The low usage rate and h
141. e the maximum number of messages and maximum message length can be decreased on as many of the server s LCOSs as is feasible Speech Usage Report Each server has a maximum number of storage units available on the hard disk The number of these speech storage units called speech blocks depends on the storage hour capacity of the hard disk In addition to messages mailbox names and greetings prompts and distribution list names all consume speech storage blocks The Speech Usage Report see sample in Figure 12 10 shows the maximum number of speech blocks for your server the number of blocks in use and the percent of message storage still available during a specified reporting period The reporting period can be any hour or range of hours from the current day or portions of the most recent seven days The server administrator can choose to run either a full report which gives the statistics in 15 minute increments for each hour of the reporting period or a summary report which shows the average speech block usage for each hour Figure 12 10 Sample Standard Speech Block Usage Report SPEECH USAGE 15min REPORT Fri Apr 21 1995 10 54 am 04 17 95 15hr 16hr minutes interval Max Speech Blks 0 SPEECH HOUR 15 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE BLOCKS FREE 328304 327818 327603 327908 PERCENT USED 15 15 15 15 SPEECH HOUR 16 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE BLOCKS FREE 327708 327400 326773 326367 327062 PERCENT USED 15
142. e 7 0 Previous Billing Report You can run a Previous Billing Report when a copy of the Billing Report from the previous billing period is desired or to determine proper billing when a gather has failed This report is identical to the Billing Report except that it uses the data from the previous billing data file The server gives you the option of running this report from either the hard disk or the backup diskette Termination Report You can run a Termination Report see sample in Figure 12 25 when a mailbox is checked out and deleted or when paging service is discontinued in the middle of a billing cycle The Termination Report shows charges for each mailbox individually by statistic then gives a total in the same format as the Billing Report A typical use of the Termination Report is in the hotel or motel environment The report can be run either before or after the mailbox is checked out but the results can be different e If you run the Termination Report before the mailbox is checked out and there are unplayed messages the server does not charge for disk usage for these messages since this resource is calculated when messages are deleted e If you run the Termination Report after the mailbox is checked out the server charges for all messages since all messages must be deleted in order to check out the mailbox To zero the billing counters you must delete then recreate the mailbox Figure 12 25 Sample Termination Report
143. e Attendant pre dial index e Billed outdial dialing order e Billed outdial index e Billing number e Department code FCOS GCOS e Internal outdial index e LCOS e Mailbox s extension e Mailbox s extension pre dial index e Mailbox name e Message waiting type e NCOS e No passcode e Range of mailboxes TCOS e Tutorial enabled e Unbilled outdial index Figure 12 28 Sample Mailbox Search Utility Report Mailbox Search Utility Fri Apr 21 16 53 51 1995 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 187 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 MAILBOX 1000 Created 12 20 94 12 49 pm MSGS 0 UNPLAYED 0 URGENT 0 RECEIPT 0 LCOS Default L FCOS FAX MSGUNDELETE 1 GCOS Default GCOS 1 1 NCOS Default 1 TCOS Default TCOS 1 w L RCOS 1 BAD LOGS 0 LAST LOG 12 20 94 12 53 pm MINS 0 0 PASSWD N TUTOR N DAY M NIGHT M NAME CODE EXTEN 1000 INDEX 0 ATTEN DN INDEX 0 ACCESS NONE NOTIFICATION Y INTERNAL INDEX NONE BILLED INDEX NONE NON BILLED INDEX NONE CALL PLACEMENT INDEX NONE TIME ZONE OFFSET 0 DISTRIBUTION LISTS WITH CHANGE RIGHTS all DISTRIBUTION LISTS WITH REVIEW RIGHTS all MAILBOX 1111 Created 01 18 95 3 23 pm MSGS 0 UNPLAYED 0 URGENT 0 RECEIPT 0 LCOS NYNEX Basic x 2 FCOS FAX MSGUNDELETE ll GCOS Default GCOS 1 al NCOS Default gt 1 TCOS Default TCOS 1 RCOS 1 BAD LOGS 0 LAST LOG NEVER MINS 0 0 PASSWD N TUTOR N DAY
144. e Group Class of Service GCOS manages communication between mailboxes e Restriction Class of Service RCOS controls the outdial applications such as Call Placement message delivery pages and faxes and limits these telephone calls by either area code or prefix wo classes of service are described in detail in other guides e A Network Class of Service NCOS controls network access for users see the WP Net Manual e A Tenant Class of Service TCOS manages mailbox interaction between user communities see the Enhanced SMDI Integration Manual Limits Class of Service This section covers e How an LCOS works Default LCOS e LCOS for the administrator s and attendant s mailboxes e Interaction between LCOS and FCOS e Configuration requirements e Prompts language selection Summary of limits parameters Overview An LCOS consists of various parameters that control time and storage functions for a mailbox such as how long messages can be how many messages can be stored as well as the Prompt set in that mailbox An LCOS is the best resource for controlling disk storage use You can configure up to 640 LCOSs in a system An LCOS Is part of every mailbox s configuration For example in LCOS 2 you can set the copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 107 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Caller Message Length limits parameter to two minutes and the Message Count limits paramete
145. e Tenant Class of Service TCOS assigned to this mailbox the TCOS name if any follows the colon and the TCOS number follows the name The Restriction Class of Service RCOS assigned to this mailbox the RCOS name if any follows the colon and the RCOS number follows the name If no RCOS is assigned to a mailbox this field is blank The number of times in the present passcode trip period that an invalid passcode was entered LAST LOG MINS PASSWD The data of the last Mailbox owner login Never means the mailbox owner has not yet logged into the new mailbox Disk usage in minutes of speech to the nearest tenth of a minute Indicates whether the mailbox is passcode protected Y or not passcode protected N TUTOR Indicates whether the default tutorial for a new mailbox owner is activated Y or not activated N DAY The NP Receptionist day treatment type NIGHT The NP Receptionist night treatment type NAME The name assigned to this mailbox CODE The department code assigned to this mailbox TEXTEN For NP Receptionist only the extension number to call INDEX For NP Receptionist only the extension pre dial index ATTEND DN The extension of a human attendant such as a lobby receptionist INDEX The pre dial index for the human attendant s extension ACCESS The code a caller must enter to hear a mailbox greeting NOTIFICATION Indicates whether the mailbox has pager outdial notificati
146. e and software must be purchased from your distributor to run a Video Dispatch system Optional Features The other pre programmed RS 232 message waiting indicators interfaces listed below are Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 72 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 optional features For more information about any of them contact your distributor e BBL Pager e Hyatt Encore PMS Integration e PMS Integration e HIS PMS Integration e Hitachi PMS Integration e Hitachi DX e ITT Programmable I nterface The Programmable option allows you to customize the RS 232 message indicator software interface between the server and the PBX All codes are sent in ASCII Numbers letters and certain special characters Table 5 3 are understood by the software Configuring a Pre Programmed RS 232 Interface Configuring any of these interfaces consists of defining a serial port then making selections from the respective interface menu See Message Waiting Indicators in the task list for configuration procedures Use the RS 232 Message Waiting Lights Worksheet Figure 5 2 to organize the information you need for configuring one of these interfaces If the interface is an optional feature also contact your local distributor for additional directions A blank worksheet is located in Volume 2 of this Manual Configuring the Programmable I nterface The RS 232 Message Waiting Lights Worksheet Figure 5 2 orga
147. e bit 147 Send receipt after full play controls whether the server waits for a mailbox owner to explicitly keep a message by pressing K or discard it by pressing D before sending a receipt to the sender of that message The server makes this decision only after a mailbox owner plays the entire message The presence of this feature bit works on a partially played message exactly as it does ona completely played message Otherwise it would be possible for the server to put a partially played message into a mailbox owner s saved queue but not send a receipt 147 has an effect only when it and feature bit 145 are in the same FCOS Refer to the Features Class of Service chapter for more information on how these two feature bits interact Types of Mailboxes in a Typical I nstallation Besides standard mailboxes a server typically has an administrator s mailbox up to five attendant s mailboxes and other special mailboxes Basically special mailboxes have all the characteristics of standard mailboxes plus special privileges and capabilities Standard Mailboxes A standard mailbox is a collection point for voice messages It also has greetings and prompts associated with it and can be configured to provide an array of capabilities related to voice messaging The classes of service mentioned earlier are the means by which you can configure mailboxes to provide the desired capabilities Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 93 Mite
148. e directory number DN and the mailbox number are the same The server expects this to be the case because it includes the mailbox number as the DN when it sends a message indicators request to the PBX Sometimes though the DN and mailbox number are different In those cases do the following to make sure users get message waiting indication e Enable this parameter e Put the DN in the Department Code parameter of the mailbox s configuration The software supports up to 2000 department codes After you complete these steps the server uses the value of the Department Code parameter in the mailbox s configuration as the DN when it sends the request to the PBX Testing See the task list for testing procedures copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 70 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 RS 232 Message Waiting I ndicators I nterfaces This application allows servers to turn PBX message waiting indicators on and off by sending signals to the PBX over RS 232 data links The data links can be either direct serial connections to the PBX or they can connect to modems that are connected to analog ports on the PBX When a message is left in a mailbox the server sends an ASCII message that tells the PBX to turn on the message waiting indicator at the appropriate station Conversely when all unplayed messages are played the server sends an ASCII string that directs the PBX to turn off the message waiting
149. e following to implement call placement Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 42 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Pager Systems Supported You can configure the server with up to 16 different outdial access codes each identified by an index number 0 15 Each outdial line group does not need to support all access codes for example a line group dedicated to radio paging for the local area code does not need to support an access code designed for long distance call placement Assigning only the required access codes to an outdial line group makes it easier to plan and control traffic and prevent abuse The mailbox configuration specifies these access codes for use in placing internal calls unbilled external calls and external calls charged to a billing number You enter the appropriate pager system numbers as the internal outdial index billed outdial index and unbilled outdial index The Pager Systems supported parameter assigns specific pager systems to the line group that is currently selected You should analyze your needs carefully before assigning pager systems For example if your server will have message delivery call placement and outdialing to radio pagers you should take into account the fact that a single message delivery can take several minutes while the user plays the message answers it etc while activating a radio pager takes a fraction of that time Therefore you might want to as
150. e hard disk and controls call processing Procedures The following frequently used procedures do not fit into any one category You must use them when performing many other procedures that are mentioned elsewhere in this manual These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number Activate the Inactive Configuration CP 7002 Add or Delete Feature Bits CP 5011 Assign an FCOS to a Mailbox CP 5003 Customize an FCOS Copy CP 5007 Define a Line Group CP 5010 Duplicate a Configuration CP 5044 Perform a Floppy Backup CP 5703 Run a System Configuration Report CP 4353 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Verify Configuration Parameters CP 5015 Applications These are the applications provided with your NuPoint Messenger server Your server may use one or more of them Each of these applications must be in a separate ine group a group of telephone lines connected to the server if you have more than one application running with the exception of NP Receptionist and NuPoint Agent NuPoint Voice Application This is the basic business application used for message taking and retrieval Most of the modifiers discussed later are explained in terms of this application In addition many of the modifiers are discussed in some detail in the NuPoint Voice Application chapter DID NuPoint Voice Application Similar to the NuPoint Voice application but fo
151. e mailbox Pager Number parameter to specify the individual pager number the calling card number and the display data all of which are unique to this pager In most installations however DID display pagers share a common area code and prefix 0 612 555 in this case and configuring the area code and prefix into the outdial index allows more than one pager to use that pager system The organization of the dial string is Pager system dial string T9T0612555 Pager Number 4534 4 G5031 02533346666 Post Pager Number G6446 The paging Mailbox Worksheet entries are Pager access type B billed outdial index Billing order nb Message delivery No Finally to use the calling card capability you must set Phoneline Exception 32 to a value between 35 and 40 The default is 24 Refer to the NuPoint Messenger Installation and Service Manual for your platform to do this Individual Rates The server s billing rates structure does allow you to specify an individual rate for each pager system This rate is multiplied by the number of pages that are issued for the mailbox If you put message delivery accounts and radio pager accounts on separate pager systems you can increase the charges on the pager systems that serve message delivery subscribers to compensate for any toll charges that the telephone company levies User Telephone I nterface The following paragraphs discuss the user telephone interface for paging message delivery call pla
152. e mailboxes and then callers can reach the local mailbox to get the information they need Or you could use it to broadcast to remote mailboxes through NP Net an optional feature Broadcast Message Mailbox A broadcast message mailbox must contain a distribution list 01 If you want the broadcast message mailbox to be able to keep messages that have been broadcasted it must first be able to receive messages Add any of the receive feature bits to the broadcast message mailbox Feature bit 043 Receive message of the day is needed only if the broadcast message mailbox is also the user s on y mailbox In the LCOS assigned to this mailbox you should set a shorter message length so the mailbox will not fill up too quickly Broadcast Greeting Name or Passcode Mailbox Broadcast greeting is a method of propagating a newly recorded or modified greeting to a list of mailboxes similar to the method used for propagating messages with broadcast messages mailboxes Broadcast name is identical in concept to broadcast greeting except that newly recorded and modified names will be propagated to the broadcast list Broadcast passcode is similar except that it propagates a new mailbox passcode to the list You can create the broadcast list for a broadcast greeting name or passcode mailbox like any distribution list either from the User Options menu or from the List Maintenance Menu at the server maintenance console All three of these mailbox ty
153. e master distribution list messages 074 Create or modify user distribution list 134 Broadcast message waiting status 222 Deny nesting of distribution lists In addition these limits affect distribution lists e Maximum number of distribution lists maximum 99 e Maximum recipients count maximum 65 535 For more information see the Features Class of Service and Other Classes of Service chapters Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 89 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Distribution List Interaction With LCOS You can use LCOS settings to control the number of distribution lists per mailbox the number of members per list and the maximum number of recipients for any message The specific limits that apply to distribution lists are e Maximum members per distribution list maximum 65 535 e Maximum number of distribution lists maximum 99 e Maximum recipients count maximum 65 535 You can use the Maximum recipients count limit to control the impact of nested distribution lists The server does not deliver the message to more recipients than this limit allows even if the total recipients in the nested distribution lists is greater Note The maximum for a distribution list in a tree or rotational mailbox is 190 members For more information on any of these features see the Other Classes of Service chapter Distribution List nteraction With GCOS Distribution lists are a
154. e voice messages from callers Wink A short interruption in single frequency tone showing the CO is ready to receive digits you just dialed Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 211
155. eached by pressing 1 after the greeting the next lowest numbered mailbox number can be reached by pressing 2 etc Up to 190 child mailboxes can be added A greeting that directs a caller to enter an appropriate number must be recorded As an example of a tree mailbox suppose that a major hotel chain wants to route callers to a particular reservations desk The tree mailbox greeting could be Welcome to Globe Hotels world wide reservation service Press 1 for hotels in Canada and the US press 2 for hotels in Mexico and South America press 3 for hotels in Europe Figure 6 11 illustrates this arrangement To implement this arrangement you would first plan for two series of numbers to be processed in the same order e The mailbox numbers for the three reservations desks e The single digit numbers callers press on the key pad to reach these mailboxes The chart below gives an example Department Mailbox Digit callers press to reach mailbox Canada US 104 1 Mexico S America 106 f Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 102 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Europe 07 f Second you would assign the Tree FCOS to a standard mailbox that acts as the tree mailbox You would then create standard mailboxes for each reservation desk to act as child mailboxes Next you would add the child mailbox numbers to distribution list 01 of the tree mailbox Finally you would record a gr
156. eature without removing all the settings Use this option to temporarily remove the paging option from a mailbox copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 49 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Enter Y or N Y to suppress pages The default is N do not suppress pages Set this field to N to resume the paging option after turning it off Pager start time This is the time that the server starts sending pages for this mailbox By setting both start and stop time to 12 00 a m paging is available 24 hours Enter the time in the form hh mm xm where hh is hours mm is minutes and xm is either a m or p m The default is 12 00 a m Pager stop time This works with Pager start time above and is the time the server stops sending pages for this mailbox The default is 12 00 a m Paging Considerations This section covers specifics applicable only to paging Changes by the Server Administrator You can alter the following mailbox information to use paging e FCOS e LCOS e Pager number e Post pager number Changes by Mailbox Owners From a pushbutton telephone mailbox owners can modify the following parameters e Telephone number to send pages e Time at which the server starts paging e Time at which the server stops paging To allow mailbox owners to reset these parameters you might need to modify the mailbox owners mailbox configuration e An FCOS that includes
157. ecord their first greeting These considerations are discussed in the following paragraphs Logging I nto Greeting Only DID Mailboxes DID mailboxes with FCOS 6 Greeting Only or with any other FCOS that issues greetings but does not allow receipt of outside caller messages have a different login procedure To log into one of these DID mailboxes a mailbox owner must 1 Press the star or zero key during the playing of the greeting This does not interrupt the greeting 2 When the entire greeting has been played the server asks the mailbox owner to enter a passcode if there is one The mailbox owner is not required to wait for the prompt but is required to wait until the entire greeting plays before entering the passcode The mailbox owner is now logged in Recording the First Greeting for Greeting Only DI D Mailboxes Newly created Greeting Only DID mailboxes do not have greetings when new mailbox owners try to reach their mailbox to record a greeting the server responds That is not a valid mailbox number Mailbox owners can log into a Greeting Only mailbox that does not have a greeting by pressing the star key or zero key during the playing of That is not a valid mailbox number then entering the passcode after the prompt has finished playing However this procedure can be confusing to a new mailbox owner and can make the first experience with the server unnecessarily difficult To avoid this situation and to
158. ed e PBX special access code parameter if any Appropriate on or off dial string parameter the pre DN on dial string pre DN off dial string post DN on dial string or post DN off dial string Note If you enable this parameter enabled is the default do not enter a T code as the first part of the special access code If you do the server waits for two separate dial tones But two separate dial tones cannot occur in this context so every message indicator request fails If you disable this parameter you typically begin the special access code with the S Go Off Hook Do Not Wait for Dial Tone code PBX Special Access Code Some PBXs require the server to dial a special access code before sending message indicators requests The special access code indicates to the PBX that one of its special features is about to be invoked Table 5 1 lists the characters allowed in this code Note The NuPoint Messenger server automatically configures a T Go Off Hook Wait for Dial Tone as the first part of the outdial string DO NOT enter aT as the first part of the special access code because then the server waits for two separate dial tones There is no default PBX special access code Dial Tone Confirmation Answer Yes to this parameter only if 1 a PBX special access code is required and 2 if after the special access code has been sent the PBX expects the server to wait for a dial tone before the server outdials any other digits
159. ed mailboxes or excessive message storage possibly signaling abuse copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 141 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 The Mailbox Data Report in the Reports Menu contains information on the number of recent bad login attempts and the date of the last mailbox owner login indicating Never for a new mailbox Because this report covers all mailboxes and contains a lot of information you should first use other reports to examine potential abuse problems With the mailbox search option you can find mailboxes that meet certain criteria such as those having a specific FCOS or GCOS or those with no passcode or with the tutorial enabled If you suspect server abuse you can identify the mailboxes involved by performing a search with the right criteria You can track high levels of incoming and outgoing mailbox traffic with the Call Detail Recorder CDR optional feature Audit Trail If you are the Server Superuser root you can obtain an audit trail report of all persons who have logged in during any given period The server records activities you perform at a maintenance console in a log that becomes an audit trail The information recorded includes the user ID time and date of activity the menus reached actions taken and some other details that you can specify This information can be used after the fact to investigate unauthorized use or hackers Only the s
160. ed outdial or unbilled outdial When you select message waiting type 5 pager while creating or modifying a mailbox you must set the parameters in the following list e Pager access type e Pager access code index e Pager number e Post pager number e Pager frequency e Pager interval e Message delivery enabled or disabled e Suppressing of pages enabled or disabled e Busy pager attempts e Busy pager interval e Pager start time e Pager stop time e Additional pager if any e Call placement access type pager access code index e Pager outcall notification enabled or disabled For procedures on creating or modifying mailboxes with paging or message delivery notification or call placement ability see Message Delivery or Paging in the task list Volume 2 of this manual The material in this section explains how the mailbox configuration works Pager System Access Code The dial string that you formulate is divided into three parts The first part of the string is the pager system access code which is represented in the mailbox by the internal outdial index billed outdial index or unbilled outdial index The balance of the string is split between the pager number and the post pager number See Pager System Dial Strings in the previous section for information on configuring the pager system An outdial index is a number from 0 to 15 It assigns a pager system to the mailbox Even if you want to enter the entire
161. ed to perform several administration functions including creating and deleting mailboxes You can protect this mailbox by changing the mailbox number to be any number up to 11 digits you do not have to leave the administrator s mailbox number at the default setting and by requiring a passcode for successful login If you change the Administrator s mailbox to a long number be sure the Dial Plan allows it or change the Dialing Plan Note The administrator s mailbox must have a passcode The passcode cannot be the same as the mailbox number and it cannot be a trivial passcode for example 1234 8888 You can also set the FCOS for the administrator s mailbox to require an access code before callers can leave a message If the administrator s mailbox number is not an integrated extension number you have to access the mailbox by calling the server pressing the star key at the first greeting entering the administrator s mailbox number then another and the passcode If the FCOS requires an access code you would have to enter it before you could press the second thus adding a second level of passcodetype protection You can also use FCOS settings to further restrict access to the mailbox to only certain ports or to deny login to the mailbox feature bit 001 If you deny login to the mailbox you must use the server console to allow login prior to doing any administration by phone Security Reports and Audit Trails Several of the
162. eeting similar to the one mentioned earlier for the tree mailbox Types of Child Mailboxes Child mailboxes in the distribution list of a tree mailbox can themselves be trees or any other types of mailboxes For example by assigning an FCOS such as Unlimited or Restricted to a child mailbox callers can leave messages Figure 6 11 Sample Tree Mailbox Arrangement Server Assigns Caller Input Digits The server assigns the digits 1 2 and 3 to the mailboxes in distribution list 01 digit 1 to the first mailbox in the list digit 2 to the second mailbox in the list and so on If the list is sorted digit 1 is assigned to the lowest numbered mailbox digit 2 to the next lowest numbered mailbox and so on If you assign additional mailboxes to the list then you should change the tree mailbox s greeting to reflect the new choices available For sorted distribution lists if you delete a mailbox from the list or if new numbers are assigned to mailboxes you must change the greeting to reflect the new order These changes would not affect unsorted distribution lists More Than Nine Child Mailboxes If you have more than nine child mailboxes the server pauses briefly after single digit entries to allow for more digits To speed up processing the greeting should tell users they can enter 2 instead of 2 for the second branch Routing of Calls If callers do not enter a digit after listening to the greeting in a tree mailbox they are
163. efault for this parameter is zero no delay and in most cases it does not need to be changed A delay of up to 1 2 second can be required for certain applications for example the NuPoint Voice application and the NP Receptionist optional feature that use E amp M trunks Users need to use this delay if the application software sometimes answers an incoming call before all the digits are received causing the switch to stop sending digits This can happen when E amp M trunks are being used The Delay Before Answer parameter can be helpful with other types of trunks and applications In cases where the DID application does not work for a customer because the server answers too fast this parameter should resolve the problem Note The answer delay for the first call into a port after any online configuration change FCOS LCOS GCOS NCOS line group phoneline exceptions is up to a second longer than for subsequent calls Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 26 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 on the port Consequently changes to the answer delay parameter do not become effective until the second call is made into the port Mailbox Passcodes NuPoint Messenger includes security devices to protect your installation at a server level and mailbox level A device for use at the mailbox level is mailbox passcodes which you configure through the NuPoint Voice application The following paragraphs outli
164. elephone 079 Set message wait 1 for urgent messages only 080 Set message wait 2 for urgent messages only 124 Change paging number 168 Message wait 1 pager requeue 169 Message wait 2 pager requeue 181 Paging over message delivery message waiting 1 over message waiting 2 182 Use pri alt as week weekend for MWI message waiting type 1 183 Use pri alt as week weekend for MWI message waiting type 2 p12 Send page upon answer greeting only mailbox Pager Re Queue The pager re queue feature is activated by feature bit 168 for schedule one and bit 169 for schedule two If you have paging scheduled from 9 a m to 5 p m and receive a call at midnight the server does not automatically page you at 9 a m and does not page until another message arrives during the scheduled time period By including these feature bits in the FCOS you assigned to the paging mailbox you are called as soon as the scheduled start time begins instead of having to wait for another message For further information on FCOSs and feature bits see the Features Class of Service chapter Changing an LCOS Definition The limits listed in Table 4 3 affect paging mailboxes You might need to change the LCOS assigned to the paging mailbox accordingly The limits listed in the table and discussed in the following paragraphs are e Pagers per billing period e Paging phone length e Receipt retention regular Pages Per Billing Period This limit can control the numb
165. em COs FCOS Features Class of Service a combination of features By assigning an FCOS to a mailbox the Administrator determines what capabilities a mailbox has Feature bit The smallest unit of NuPoint Voice mailbox capability also called a feature or an FCOS bit avoid the latter term as it is often confused with FCOS Each feature bit has a number and a name Example Feature bit 053 Keep messages allows users to store messages in their mailboxes after they have played them You cannot assign an individual feature bit to a mailbox you must assign a feature bit to an FCOS and assign the FCOS to the mailbox FPSA Functionally Partitioned System Administration Server software that prevents unauthorized changes and offers better security Functionally Partitioned System Administration See FPSA Full screen interface An input screen on the server maintenance console where data is entered in different places by moving the cursor around the screen Items can be changed and then all are saved at the same time Contrast with scrolling interface Give Ability to send an existing message to another user Greetings Information meant to welcome callers when they reach the NuPoint Voice application or a mailbox Typically callers hear a general company greeting directions for using the system and a greeting from a user when they call from outside the system Administrators Attendants and users can record greetings Greeting Only M
166. enger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 NP View Mailbox Configuration Two reports are available to show mailbox configuration one through the Reports Menu and one through the Mailbox Maintenance Menu The report available through the Reports Menu is keyed to mailboxes themselves while the report available through the Mailbox Maintenance Menu is keyed to search criteria you specify Mailbox Data Report This report shows the configuration of every mailbox in the server Figure 12 27 shows an excerpt from a sample Mailbox Data Report Table 12 3 describes the fields in the report Figure 12 27 Mailbox Data Report MAILBOX DATA REPORT Fri Apr 21 16 34 34 1995 MAILBOX 998 Created 12 05 94 1 30 pm MSGS 0 UNPLAYED 0 URGENT 0 RECEIPT 0 LCOS Default 1 FCOS FAX MSGUNDELETE 1 GCOS Default GCOS 1 rae NCOS Default 1 TCOS Default TCOS 1 sd RCOS 1 BAD LOGS 0 LAST LOG NEVER MINS 0 0 PASSWD N TUTOR N DAY M NIGHT M NAME CODE EXTEN 998 INDEX 0 ATTEN DN INDEX 0 ACCESS NONE NOTIFICATION Y INTERNAL INDEX 0 BILLED INDEX 0 NON BILLED INDEX 0 CALL PLACEMENT INDEX NONE TIME ZONE OFFSET 0 DISTRIBUTION LISTS WITH CHANGE RIGHTS all DISTRIBUTION LISTS WITH REVIEW RIGHTS all MAILBOX 999 Created 12 05 94 1 30 pm MSGS 0 UNPLAYED 0 URGENT 0 RECEIPT 0 LCOS Default 1 FCOS FAX MSGUNDELETE 1 GCOS Default GCOS 1 2 1 NCOS Default 1 TCOS Default TCOS 1 rae RCOS 1 BAD LOGS 0 LAST LOG 12 19 94 1 42 pm MINS
167. enter Unit Codes as a two digit number For example numbers from 1 through 9 are entered as 01 through 09 Note If you want to verify that the AC message lamp address was entered correctly press M to modify the mailbox you have just added and press the star key in response to each prompt to leave all values unchanged The server gives the current AC message waiting lamp address as K1 not 5201 Deleting a Mailbox You can delete a single mailbox but not a range of mailboxes by phone copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 133 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Modifying a Mailbox When you select Modify from the Administration Menu the server gives the current mailbox number class of service mailbox type and AC message lamp address if applicable then prompts you for any changes To leave any value unchanged press the star key in response to the prompt See Adding a New Mailbox for coding information Setting Mailbox Passcode and Tutorial You can set or clear the passcode and enable the tutorial for a mailbox by phone This feature can be useful for getting new mailbox owners started on the server or for clearing the passcode for a mailbox owner who is unable to access his mailbox because he has forgotten his passcode Setting the Server Clock You can review or alter the server date and time by phone This feature can be useful for making a one hour correction for daylig
168. eport of Hard Disk Operational Parameters Operational Parameters for Hard Disk 0 0 Vendor IBM Model 0664M1H IP Rev 6 61 Page 1 Error Recovery Parameters Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 196 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 AWRE TRUE ARRE TRUE TB FALSE RC FALSE EER FALSE PER TRUE DTE FALSE DCR FALSE Read retry count 4 Correction span 48 Head offset count Data strobe offset count 0 Write retry count 1 Recovery time limit 0 Changeable page 1 data flags 0xf7 rd_retry 255 c_span 0 hd 0 ds 0 wt_retry 0 rcv 0 Page 2 Disconnect Reconnect Parameters Buffer full ratio 0 Buffer empty ratio 0 Bus inactivity limit 0 Disconnect time limit 0 Connect time limit 0 Maximum burst size 0 Data transfer disconnect control 0 Changeable page 2 data bf_ratio 255 be_ratio 255 inact 0 disc 0 con 0 burst 0 dtdc 0 Page 3 Format Parameters Tracks per zone 15 Alternate sectors per zone 34 Alternate tracks per zone 0 Alternate tracks per logical unit 0 Sectors per track 94 Data bytes per sector 512 Interleave factor al Track skew factor 8 Cylinder skew factor 17 Flags 0x40 Changeable page 3 data tpz 0 aspz 0 atpz 0 atpl 0 sec_per_trk 0 data_bytes 0 interleave 0 trk_skew 0 cyl_skew 0 flags 0x0 Page 4 Drive Geometry Parameters Number of cylinders 2857 Number of heads 15 Write precomp cylinder 0 Redunced
169. er mailboxes When a check in mailbox is accessed the server prompts for the mailbox number to be checked in then prompts the caller usually a hotel or motel attendant to record a name and enter a passcode for the mailbox More than one desk clerk can call into a single check in mailbox at one time so it is unnecessary to create more than one check in mailbox for your server A check out mailbox is the counterpart of the check in mailbox When the attendant calls a check out mailbox the server prompts for the mailbox number to be checked out It then gives the attendant the choice of either keeping or discarding any messages left in the mailbox Finally the server purges the guest s name greeting and passcode and follows the attendant s command about messages The mailbox is then ready to be checked in for the next guest A check out mailbox must also be created to use the hotel check in check out feature of the server Greeting Only Mailboxes When a caller reaches a Greeting Only mailbox the server plays the greeting and then hangs up Greeting Only mailboxes are established by assigning FCOS 6 Greeting Only or a similar FCOS to them To illustrate a use of a Greeting Only mailbox imagine that a theater manager wants callers to hear an announcement of show times The manager would create a mailbox with this FCOS call the mailbox log in then record a greeting The mailbox user can change the mailbox name greeting and passco
170. er of pages allowed for a billing period This allows server administrators to control the number of paging functions allowed a user per billing period and can Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 51 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 be used where a paging service is sold for a flat fee per month A limit of 0 means no limit is set Table 4 3 Paging Limits Limit Unit Default _ _Valid Values Pages per billing period pages b 0 999 Paging phone length digits z B 11 Receipt retention regular hours jo 0 8760 Paging Phone Length This controls user modification of paging The paging phone length determines the maximum number of digits users can enter for a paging number The default is 7 the allowable range is 3 to 11 digits It is useful for preventing long distance calls Note This does not apply to phone numbers entered at a server maintenance console Receipt Retention Regular This is used in the Pager application to limit the amount of time regular receipts are kept The Receipt Retention CTP limit is used with the Cut through Paging optional feature The limit can be up to 8760 hours 1 year Alternatively you can specify unlimited receipt retention by entering 0 For more information about LCOSs and limits see the Other Classes of Service chapter Action at the End of a Dial String After the last character is outdialed the server goes on hook h
171. ering Data Before the server can produce billing reports it must gather data from all the statistics that have been specified Gathering data is a three step process 1 The current billing data file which was created during the last gather becomes the new previous billing data file The server issues a warning because this step overwrites and thereby destroys the previous billing data file which was also created during the last gather 2 The server scans the statistics in all the mailboxes The data that is collected becomes the new current billing data file copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 148 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 3 The data gathered in step 1 is subtracted from the mailbox statistics This update zeros the statistics in all the mailboxes unless there was mailbox activity between steps 2 and 3 to prepare them for the next billing cycle When you run a billing report the value that is obtained during the gather for each statistic ina mailbox is multiplied by the billing rate that you assigned to that statistic The server then adds the charges for all statistics with billing rates greater than zero plus any base rate that you may have specified to give a total charge for each mailbox All billing data older than the previous billing data file is available using the regular backup procedures recommended in the nstallation and Service Manual Automatic Gather You can in
172. erminal Full Screen Interface The server has a full screen interface you use to create modify or delete mailboxes All three options are combined in one menu choice You use function keys for different options when in this mailbox menu The mailbox screen is shown in Figure 6 1 The function keys you can use in the mailbox maintenance screen are Function Key Explanation F1 Display next mailbox F2 Display previous mailbox F6 Delete mailbox F8 Statistics Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 82 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 F9 or Esc Exit the Mailbox Screen F10 Edit current mailbox s information These are the appropriate function keys when you are editing a mailbox s parameters after pressing F10 Function Key Explanation F6 Billing F7 Family Guest Mailbox Setup for VMUIF interface only F8 Display Statistics F9 Cancel edit session and ignore changes F10 Exit and Save new information Home Help based on where cursor is located End Edit Additional Fields where cursor is located Figure 6 1 shows the Message Waiting Indicator screen which you can edit for Message Waiting 1 2 and 3 Use the mailbox worksheets when creating new mailboxes The worksheets are described in the next section Figure 6 1 Mailbox Maintenance Screen Mailbox 00000000998 Code Name Classes of Service Limits Default 1 Tenant Default TCOS 1 1 Features
173. erver superuser can configure and manage an audit trail The audit trail options are e Start and stop the audit trail e Review the audit trail and print it as a report Format an audit trail report Each activity recorded by the audit trail appears as a numbered entry on a line by itself e Set the maximum entries from 1 to 999 999 in an audit trail To calculate the actual number of Audit Trail Entries which is a multiple of 63 check the value for the Maximum Number of Audit Trail Entries Divide that number by 63 round up to the nearest whole number and multiply the result by 63 to find the actual number of Audit Trail Entries e Specify the types of information that comprise an entry entry details e Specify a range of entries to be reported The audit trail resembles the server logfile but it does not need to be cleared When a specified maximum number of entries is reached the server continues to record new information overwriting the oldest information and beginning again at entry 1 When the number of entries reaches 85 90 and 95 of the maximum the server writes a warning to that effect in the error log This gives you an opportunity to stop the audit trail print it or allow it to continue if overwriting of entries is unimportant Note You can use the audit trail whether or not FPSA is activated Functionally Partitioned System Administration FPSA is a standard software feature that requires you to enter your
174. es The administrator s mailbox and attendant s mailbox are special mailboxes that interact with applications they are discussed in the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Other special mailboxes tree rotational and broadcast for example are discussed in the Mailboxes chapter Mailbox features such as Distribution Lists and receipts are also discussed in that chapter Classes of Service There are several classes of service which are groups of characteristics that affect how the server operates The different classes of service are assigned to each mailbox by the system administrator Features Class of Service The NuPoint Voice software has over two hundred feature bits that allow users to perform functions or that control how the server can be used These features are grouped into a set called a Features Class of Service FCOS that define who can do what and how One FCOS is assigned to each mailbox FCOSs are explained in the Features Class of Service chapter Limits Class of Service A Limits Class of Service LCOS is a group of limitations on each user such as length and number of messages LCOSs also affect how some optional features work One LCOS is assigned to each mailbox These are explained in the Other Classes of Service chapter Group Class of Service A Group Class of Service GCOS determines which users can send messages or respond to messages from other users There are two kinds of GCOSs affinity and bi
175. esults of an Offline System Verify with an Online System Verify the number of messages will differ The Offline Verify see sample in Figure 12 18 reports the actual number of messages contained in the server The Online Verify see sample in Figure 12 19 reports the maximum number of messages the server can contain For complete information on both Online and Offline Verify refer to the appropriate nsta lation and Service Manua for your platform Figure 12 18 Sample Offline System Verify Report gt gt gt Acme Products System lt lt SYSTEM VERIFY LOGFILE Tue Feb 9 1995 12 33 pm gt gt gt Acme Products System lt lt lt Verify Speech File Utility Tue Feb 7 1995 2 42 pm Verify virtual speech drive 2 Verifying master control sector Verifying prompt speech Verifying transient speech Summary of Speech File System Status TOTAL USED FULL Number of Prompt Directory Sectors 0020 28 Number of Prompt Pointer Sectors ofao 0475 29 Number of Transient Pointer Sectors 55f0 0000 0 Number of Prompt Speech Blocks Ofao 0679 41 Number of Transient Speech Blocks oofa00 000000 0 1141 prompt s verified 0 prompt s contained errors 0 transient message s verified message s contained errors 0 message s fixed gt gt gt Acme Products System lt lt lt Verify OAA Records Utility Tue Feb 7 1995 2 45 pm New verify sequence number 111 New verify create sequence number 110 Ver
176. etings and Prompts Allow a Transfer Automatically After a Greeting Configure for Name and Greeting Broadcast Configure for a Receipt Notice or Receipt Summary Copy a Mailbox Greeting Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 78 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Enable an Alternate Company Greeting Enable or Disable a Message of the Day Enable or Disable Tutorials Record an Alternate Company Greeting Record Company Greetings Schedule Company Greetings Set Languages for Prompts Test Conditional Greetings Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 79 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Mailboxes Mailboxes Configuration Configure a Broadcast Mailbox Configure a Chain Mailbox Configure a Rotational Mailbox Configure a Standard Mailbox Configure a Shared Extension Mailbox Configure a Tree Mailbox Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 80 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Configure an Overflow Mailbox Define an Administrator s Mailbox Define an Attendant s Mailbox Delete a Mailbox Inquire About Mailboxes Modify a Mailbox Configuration Search for Mailboxes Set the Passcode Passcode Count and Tutorial Setting for a Mailbox Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 81 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Test Mailbox Capabilities Test Message Waiting
177. eversing its polarity grounding the M lead e Once the server is working use caution when substituting telephone line cords Two kinds of line cords are commonly available You can tell them apart by the positions of the two tabs on their end connectors The standard cord that is the most readily available has tabs on opposite sides of the line cord The other type which is sometimes called a data cord has tabs that are both on the same side of the line cord Replacing an existing line cord with a different type can take the port out of service The standard cord tabs on opposite sides reverses the positions of the E amp M leads but maintains Tip amp Ring polarity Plugging in a cord that switches E amp M lead positions between the Tellabs cards and the NuPoint Messenger server immediately takes the server off hook and holds the port out of service The data cord tabs on the same side maintains E amp M continuity but reverses Tip amp Ring polarity Plugging in a cord that reverses polarity between the CO and the Tellabs equipment automatically makes the trunk busy and effectively takes it out of service copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 35 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Usage Considerations In a DID environment there are mailbox login differences if you are using Greeting Only DID mailboxes In addition a DID environment can confuse new mailbox owners when they r
178. f you need to add a pager that requires the outdialing of more than 16 characters thus the coding string is too long to fit into the pager number field and no appropriate outdial index already exists you must configure a new pager system before you can add the pager Pager Number The pager number tells the server what numbers and or characters to dial after the pager system dial string and before the post pager number See Pager System Dial Strings in the previous section Pager numbers are limited to 16 characters A mailbox FCOS with feature bit 124 User can change paging phone number or 143 User can change message delivery number allows the user to change the pager number without affecting the post pager number Refer to the Features Class of Service chapter for more information about FCOSs and feature bits Post Pager Number The post pager number is used in two cases With display pagers the post pager number typically the NuPoint Voice telephone number or the mailbox owner s mailbox number is displayed on the pager screen A second use is when the mailbox owner can change the pager number and non numeric pager dial string characters must be transmitted after the pager number to ensure a successful page If the mailbox owner changes the pager number then these non numeric characters cannot be entered on the telephone set In this case the post pager number tells the server what numbers and or characters to dial after the
179. feature bit 070 and either 077 or 124 or both e The LCOS that sets limits for the length of paging phone numbers e The post pager number Feature Bits Used in Paging Mailboxes Feature bits listed in Table 4 2 control paging Two that deserve special mention affect changes to the weekday weekend schedule and pager re queuing Change Weekday Weekend Schedule With one exception users of any Pager application can set schedules for weekdays or weekends showing when they can be reached The exception is that when NP TDD is enabled call scheduling is not available Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 50 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 To change a paging schedule a mailbox owner s mailbox must have an FCOS that includes feature bit 077 Change pager schedule To change a paging number a mailbox owner s mailbox must have an FCOS that includes bit 124 Change paging phone number Both these bits require bit 070 User Options Menu to work The mailbox owner s mailbox FCOS must contain bit 182 or 183 to change the schedule according to the weekday or weekend Note If mailbox owners pager numbers contain characters not on the keypad such as G or T put a post pager number in their mailboxes to transmit these codes Table 4 2 Feature Bits That Control Paging Feature Function 070 User Options Menu 077 Enable paging from a telephone allow schedule changes from a t
180. ffected by the GCOS settings that control the ability of any mailbox owner to send messages to other mailbox owners You must ensure that all members of a master distribution list have GCOS settings that allow them to exchange messages Mailbox owners cannot add recipients who do not share GCOS settings to their distribution lists For more information on Group Class of Service see the Other COS Chapter Mailbox Settings for Distribution Lists Each mailbox has two parameters that are specific to distribution lists e Lists with review rights e Lists with change rights These parameters control which lists a mailbox owner can review or change Review rights allow the owner to play the names and numbers of all mailboxes in a list Denying review rights can keep the contents of a list confidential Change rights allow the owner to add or delete mailboxes in alist Denying change rights prevents the user from altering a distribution list which is helpful for certain applications such as networking that require distribution lists List Maintenance The List Maintenance Menu allows you to create modify delete and view distribution lists in any mailbox You can also locate all lists that contain a specific mailbox and delete that mailbox from all lists By using Administration by Phone you can create modify delete and review master distribution lists in an administrators mailbox and you can record names for those lists From an administr
181. g Post DN Off String Enter the coding if any that must be sent after the directory number to turn message waiting indicators off There is no default post DN off string Department Code as DN Enter Yes if you want the server to send the department code as the DN when issuing a request to turn indicators on or off When this feature is set at the default value No the server sends the mailbox number as the DN Figure 5 2 Sample RS 232 Message Waiting Lights Worksheet Unplayed Number Sent Enter Yes if you want the server to send the number of unplayed messages after the DN when issuing a request to turn indicators on The default value is No Delay After Post DN String This parameter is the period of time in seconds between the post DN off string and the ending trailer string This delay gives the PBX time to process each request correctly If requests come too quickly the PBX could drop or corrupt them From 0 to 255 seconds can be specified There is no default delay Ending Trailer String If the PBX requires this string the server sends it after the delay just described Use the characters in Table 5 3 to create this string up to 30 characters long There is no default ending trailer string Suppress Updates to MWL Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 A server administrator can configure whether message waiting indicator on or off requests
182. g messages in high security mailboxes You set the access codes when configuring each individual mailbox You can further ensure the privacy of mailbox users by not putting them in the Dial by Name database feature bit 092 or by not allowing the mailbox name or extension number to be played bit 202 This latter feature can be especially important in hotel or dormitory situations Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 137 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Audiotext Tree Mailboxes You can protect audiotext applications by requiring callers to enter an access code feature bit 137 before hearing the information Because you can design audiotext applications as a series of mailboxes each with individual information you can set a unique access code for each piece of information to ensure corporate security You can configure audiotext applications to hang up after playing the greeting feature bit 062 or transfer to the mailbox attendant bit 063 or mailbox extension bit 064 You can also deny login from within the tree bit 152 Protection From Mailbox Owner Abuse The revenue of a service bureau is dependent on being able to bill mailbox owners for use of the server Likewise the corporate telecommunications manager must control use and potential abuse of corporate resources to provide the best service while controlling costs and maintaining security The server allows you to place controls and
183. g a passcode that is the same as the mailbox number feature bit 130 or from using trivial passcodes such as 1234 or 8888 feature bit 201 If a caller enters the wrong passcode when trying to get into a mailbox the server requires the caller to enter the correct passcode twice or the server hangs up Callers are not told whether the mailbox number or the passcode was incorrect hackers do not know if they have even half of a valid combination You can use feature bit 081 to set the server to only require a single correct passcode after an incorrect attempt but this reduces the effectiveness of the security feature The server tracks bad passcode attempts for each mailbox and compares the number to the parameters set for the line group If the bad passcode attempts for a mailbox exceeds the number allowed in the passcode trip period the server plays a bad passcode warning at the next login so that the mailbox owner knows that someone may have tried to gain unauthorized entry Feature bit 132 allows you to enable a bad passcode lockout in which a mailbox is locked when the threshold of bad passcode attempts is reached Only the server administrator can unlock the mailbox set a new temporary passcode reset the tutorial and require reinitialization from the integrated telephone number feature bit 142 New Mailboxes When you create a new mailbox you can designate a temporary passcode for that mailbox either by making up a passcode or
184. g system rather than the dial up system shown here Figure 4 1 Pager Call Processing Paging has these features e Three types of pager support tone display voice e Paging can be activated for specific types of messages e Users can specify the hours available for paging e Users can enter the number to be paged e Limits for paging can be set through the Limits Class of Service LCOS e The server can track number of pages for billing purposes e Pages can be billed to a credit card or other billing account Message Delivery Message delivery provides message waiting indication by calling a mailbox owner at a pre configured telephone number When the phone is answered the server says Hello user s name You have number unplayed message s in your mailbox Please enter your passcode When the mailbox owner enters a passcode the server says You have number unplayed messages in your mailbox Press P to play the first message The mailbox owner is now logged into the mailbox and can use any of the features Play Make Give etc available to that mailbox The server prompts for the passcode once then waits 30 seconds for a response If someone other than the user answers and does not know the passcode the server says Call back when you can remember your passcode Good bye and hangs up Message delivery is particularly valuable for users who do not work on site and so cannot use ordinary message w
185. h some newer features NuPoint Messenger Standard Interface A wide variety of PBXs can use this interface Default settings for this interface are listed in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Default Settings for Standard I nterface Strin Setting Initialization string r r r three carriage returns Reply string None Pre DN ON string M1 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 71 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Post DN OFF string See the table of ASCII codes under Configuring the Programmable Interface for definitions of these settings Specialized Message Waiting Indicator Systems The following specialized message waiting indicator systems require the purchase of additional hardware and software Instructions for installing and configuring these systems are shipped with the products AC Message Lamp The server is equipped with the NuPoint Messenger AC Message Lamp system When you create or modify a mailbox the server prompts for the address of the user s AC message lamp unit which is set with the thumbwheel switches on the message indicator box An AC message lamp address starts with a house code which can be any letter from A through P This is followed by a unit code which can be any number from 1 through 16 Examples are A1 D5 P16 Address P1 is reserved for troubleshooting and diagnostics and must not be assigned to a mailbox After the address is entered the server prompts fo
186. hapter describes the two standard message waiting applications in a NuPoint Messenger server that can turn PBX message waiting indicators on and off and explains how to use the appropriate worksheet for configuring the desired application Topics covered include DTMF to PBX MWI Worksheets and Configuration e RS 232 MWI Worksheets and Configuration e Pre Programmed and Programmable Interfaces e PBX Information e Testing Note Many PBX integration optional features have their own method for turning message waiting indicators on and off and do not use the functions discussed in this chapter Overview Two message waiting applications can be used when an integration itself does not handle message waiting indicators The two applications DTMF to PBX Message Lights and RS 232 Message Waiting Indicators Interfaces allow the server to turn PBX message waiting on and off e DTMF to PBX uses one or more line card ports to send DTMF signals over the telephone lines e RS 232 uses one or more serial ports to send signals to the PBX over an RS 232 data link or modem between the server and the PBX You may wish to refresh or supress the message waiting indicators Reach the Supress Refresh MWI menu from the Main Menu by selecting S System Manitenance R Reconfiguration then C Supress Refresh MWI At the Supress Refresh MWI menu you can set parameters to refresh some or all message waiting indicators supress message waiting indicators f
187. he number of ports in a pager line group NuPolnt Fax Limits Menu You must have the NuPoint Fax optional feature to use these parameters For more information see the NuPoint Fax Manual Maximum Number of Digits for Telephone Number Sets the maximum number of digits a user can enter to retrieve or redirect a fax to a fax phone Enter Number of digits from 1 through 25 Default 7 digits NuPoint Fax Message Count Sets the maximum number of faxes a user can store in a mailbox Enter Number of faxes from 1 through 72 0 means no limit Default 72 Pre Greet Silence Interval to Improve Walkaway CNG Detection Length Sets the time that the server waits before playing the greeting for a fax call to send the CNG tone Typically set this to zero unless the site has noisy phone lines Enter Parameter should be set to 0 Default 0 Fax Delivery Retry Frequency Sets how many times the server tries to deliver a fax after a Busy Ring No Answer or fax unavailable call Enter Number of retries from 1 through 255 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 118 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Default 1 retry Fax Delivery Retry Interval Sets how long the server waits between tries to deliver a fax after a Busy Ring No Answer or fax unavailable call Enter Minutes from 1 through 255 Default 1 minute Mailbox amp Message Retention Limit Menu Includes parameters that determi
188. he users mailbox Primary MWI The message waiting indication that is signaled when a mailbox gets a new message If an alternate MWI is also defined that one will be signaled if the user does not respond by calling into the server Primary pager The pager that is signaled when a mailbox gets a new message If an alternate pager is also Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 207 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 defined that one will be signaled if the user does not respond by calling into the server Prompts Recorded instructions that offer options to users and callers For example after users and callers reach a mailbox they may hear the prompt Record your message Prompts can be given in foreign languages an optional feature See also Hard play and Soft play prompts Queue A group of related messages Each mailbox should have a queue for unplayed messages played messages receipts and urgent messages Receipt Notification to a user about a message s status Return receipt Request by a user for notification when a sent message has been played RCOS Restriction Class of Service a parameter assigned to mailboxes which limit what telephone numbers they can outdial Limits are placed on the area codes or exchanges a mailbox can outdial See NPA NXX screening RNA Ring No Answer a condition where an extension rings but no one answers the telephone Rotational mailbox Informat
189. he number of calls processed by the server that day TOTAL SECONDS The number of seconds that ports were busy LINE ATB COUNT copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 171 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 The number of times an ATB All Trunks Busy condition occurred on a line group LINE ATB SECONDS The total number of seconds the entire line group was busy that day FAX TRANS The number of fax transactions processed by the server that day FAX TOTAL SECONDS The number of seconds the fax transactions in the previous item took to process FAX ATB COUNT The number of times an ATB All Trunks Busy condition occurred on fax ports organized into fax groups FAX ATB SECONDS The total number of seconds the ATB conditions in the previous item was in effect FAX NO RES CNT The number of fax transactions that could not be processed because no fax resource was available NETWORKING MESSAGES These numbers give peak and total amounts for network delivery of messages NP Net both regular and urgent queues It differentiates between peak times and total per day Total Statistics Report This report shows how much of the storage capacity on the hard disk has been consumed and how much is still available Figure 12 15 shows a Sample Total System Statistics Report Figure 12 15 Sample Total System Statistics Report SYSTEM STATISTICS Fri Apr 21 11 05 40 1995 Total Free Used Message Numbers
190. he parameters that have been set for each configured application and each configured optional feature by line group Figure 12 26 Sample Configuration Report SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Fri Apr 21 16 23 04 1995 VOICEMEMO SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Group 2 pager Module 2 Lines 1 6 1 7 Fax Conn Fax Group 2 4 channels shared w other line groups Module 3 Lines 1 6 1 7 Fax Conn Fax Group 3 4 channels shared w other line groups Module 4 Lines 2 6 2 7 Fax Conn Fax Group 5 2 channels serving 2 lines DEDICATED Application PAGER DIALER Dial plan 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 N7 Administrator mbox 5852 General Greeting mbox copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 183 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Attendant mbox 5851 Wait Prompt Y Caller multiple messages enabled Y KEY 0 for attendant transfer during greeting N Disconnect string Pre company name string Pre mailbox greeting string Passcode Length Min 4 Max 10 Language E Start of day 08 00 AM End of day 05 00 PM Days of Week DDDDDNN Passcode trip count 5 Passcode trip period 24 Dial by name Last First Y Match Threshold 3 Exact Y Suppress Number N Single Digit Access N Delay Before Answer 30 E mail Transfer String Allow Dial an Extension for callers N users N Analog Networking Call Setup timeout 6 Internat
191. he task list for administrator s mailbox procedures Volume 2 of this manual The administrator s mailbox number has special privileges e The administrator s mailbox day and night greetings are the day and night company greetings If you do not record one or both of these greetings the default Welcome to the message center is played instead e Distribution lists that are created from the administrator s mailbox are server wide master lists that can be used by any mailbox owner on the server e The system administrator may add delete modify mailboxes over the telephone from the Telephone Administration Menu Attendant s Mailbox Number The initial software installation contains 10 possible default attendant s mailboxes They are as Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 23 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 follows 99 9999999 999 99999999 9999 999999999 99999 9999999999 999999 99999999999 Since the default dialing plan is 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 the default attendant s mailbox number is 999 If the ninth position digit is changed to any number between 2 and 11 the default attendant s mailbox number should be changed to the corresponding 9 9 number An error message is generated if the number does not match the mailbox dialing plan The attendant s mailbox can be any mailbox number on the server but if you select a mailbox number other than one of the defaults you must cre
192. hes pressing a series of keys the NuPoint Messenger server searches a special file for entries that match the series If it finds more than one match it plays the names and mailbox numbers of the partial matches If the server finds a unique match it plays either the user s name or personal greeting Matching Threshold Setting a threshold for playing matching names determines the maximum number of names and mailboxes the server plays in response to a partial name match A partial name match occurs in either of these cases e Callers enter some portion but not all of a recipient s name e Callers enter a complete name but the server finds more than one recipient that matches the entry Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 18 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 If more than one name is found that matches the name dialed the server plays the specified number of matching names A threshold of 3 for example means that up to three matching names will be recited even if there are more than three If the number of names for a partial match is greater than the threshold the server prompts a caller to continue entering letters Exact Match Break Specifying an exact match break determines how callers can enter the partial name of a user When yes is specified the caller hears the name and mailbox number play as soon as there is a match The caller can however end a name entry with the pound
193. ht savings time Performing Backup to Diskette You can keep backup files on diskettes for record purposes and as a precaution against inadvertent loss or destruction of the configuration and history files of the server It is recommended that you regularly back up your hard disk to diskettes The server continues to process calls during the backup process The server makes backup files on specially formatted diskettes One formatted diskette has been included with the server If necessary the server can format additional diskettes as part of the backup procedure When purchasing diskettes use 3 5 inch double sided high density 1 44 MB Be sure to label and date all backup diskettes To perform a floppy backup by phone the administrator s telephone must be close enough to the server to permit insertion of the diskettes in the floppy disk drive while the server administrator is on the phone Reporting Usage Statistics The server administrator can get server and mailbox summary usage statistics for 30 mailboxes at a time over the phone This procedure can be used in place of running a statistics report during your weekly maintenance to determine if you need to do a purge There are three ways to control the report e Respond to the prompt asking for the first mailbox number The server reports the server statistics and starts the mailbox report at the selected mailbox To cancel the report at this point simply do not respond to the promp
194. ial strings as shown in the following examples Table 8 12 Example Configuration Parameter Value Home NPA 408 Starting digit position of NPA 10 Ending digit position of NPA 8 Starting digit position of NXX 7 Ending NXX digit position of NXX 5 Digits to be absorbed 9 1 91 Exact match table is set to disallow 5551212 411 NPA table is set to allow 408 415 510 NXX table for the NPA 408 is set to disallow 662 684 728 If a dial string is 914084283558 the system 1 Removes the 91 in accordance with the absorption table 2 Compares to the exact match table and finds no match 3 Compares the NPA 408 Because the NPA 408 has an associated NXX table it is used 4 Places the call because the NXX table is a disallow table and does not contain the prefix 428 If a dial string is 2551234 the system 1 Compares to the exact match table 2 Adds the home NPA 3 Compares the NPA 408 Because the NPA 408 has an associated NXX table it is used 4 Places the call because the NXX table is a disallow table and does not contain the prefix 255 If a dial string is 14154244567 the system 1 Removes the 1 in accordance with the absorption table 2 Compares to the exact match table 3 Compares the NPA 415 Because the NPA 415 has an associated NXX table it is used 4 Blocks the call because the NXX table is a disallow table and contains the prefix 424 If a dial string is 95551212 the system 1
195. ifying mailboxes Verifying distribution lists Verifying copy lists Verifying amis lists Verifying amis lists Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 175 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Sibling lists Verifying Verifying Verifying Compiling No errors phoneline exceptions statistics data reference count statistics found NuPoint Voice Record Summary 35 mailboxes verified No errors found 0 queue errors No queue errors found 0 messages referenced No errors found 0 distribution lists verified No errors found 0 copy lists verified No errors found o sibling lists verified No errors found 1 phoneline exceptions verified No errors found Figure12 19 shows a sample of an Online Record Verify Report Figure12 20 shows a sample of an Online Sppech Verify Report Verifying Verifying Orphanded Verifying Verifying Verifying Verifying Figure 12 mailboxes Error in mailbox 3824 Error in mailbox 3846 copy lists 19 Sample Online Records Verify Report SYSTEM ACCOUNT VERIFY LOGFILE Fri Jun 16 13 05 39 1995 Verify OAA Records Utility Thu Apr 27 15 20 35 1995 New verify sequence number 39 New verify create sequence number 40 Total message count is inaccurate by 1 Total message count is inaccurate by 4 Verifying distribution lists Member count Out of Range for list 09 Mailbo
196. igh usage rate applies to all line groups The rates you set for call placement connect time apply to the entire server Measurement Method Connect time other than call placement connect time is measured in tenths of minutes 6 seconds rounded up if not exact Call placement connect time is measured in one minute units This statistic can increment to about 109 hours before the accumulator restarts at zero This is equivalent to about 3 5 hours per day for a month Calculation of Charges When charges are calculated they are based on minutes of connect time rather than tenths of a minute This is to allow rates which are precise to 0 001 to be adjusted by small amounts Disk Usage This section explains billing for disk usage Measurement Method The disk usage statistic is calculated as follows the message size multiplied by the time on disk Message size is measured in tenths of a minute 6 seconds rounded up if not exact Time on disk is measured in hours rounded up to the next hour and is calculated when the message is deleted from the server The disk usage statistic resets to zero after 16 777 215 units of usage one unit equals one tenth of a minute multiplied by 1 hour of storage This is equivalent to keeping three hours of speech for 1 year Calculation of Charges Users typically accumulate several thousand units of disk usage per month unless they delete messages immediately after they are received If the rate we
197. ilbox used when several people share one telephone Each user has a personal mailbox which is a child mailbox of the shared extension parent mailbox Callers leave a message by pressing a digit to chose a user Site Tutorial A company specified tutorial that you can create for your users It is a form of greeting SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface A standard call data packet format used in Centrex applications Soft play prompt An instruction from the NuPoint Voice application that can be interrupted by pressing a key on the telephone keypad The keypress must send a DTMF tone to the server to interrupt the instruction See also Prompts Standard tutorial A tutorial supplied that is set to play by default when a new mailbox is created and logged into for the first time Sometimes called user tutorial new user tutorial and NuPoint Voice tutorial Station Telephone set System attendant See Attendant TCOS Tenant Class of Service a mailbox option used with the SMDI integration This feature governs mailbox interaction between user communities TDD Telecommunications Device for the Deaf a terminal used by a hearing impaired person to communicate over telephone lines A TDD operator relays information from the TDD to another party and types in any spoken information which is sent back to the TDD Tie trunks Private telephone circuits used to connect two or more telephone systems together or to connect a telephone sys
198. in a group see the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Configuring the Application Configuring the DID NuPoint Voice application consists of configuring digit manipulation then as with the NuPoint Voice application establishing day and night hours establishing a mailbox dialing plan specifying call transfers and the use of attendants and identifying administrator s and attendant s mailboxes You must also decide whether to configure other operations such as a Wait prompt the default language for prompts and passcodes Digit Manipulation The CO typically transmits as requested the last three four five or seven digits of the dialed number The server accepts the transmitted digits and the application software manipulates them Digit manipulation means one or more of the following e Ignoring one or more of the leading transmitted digits e Adding a fixed quantity offset to the received digits e Subtracting a fixed quantity from the received digits Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 30 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 When the server has received the proper number of digits it answers the call with the mailbox owner s greeting Digits Expected Enter the number of digits that are supplied by the CO to this DID trunk group 1 11 digits Digits Absorbed If the number of digits expected is greater than the number of digits in a valid mailbox number the DID NuPoint Voice applic
199. in the Billing Menu The reports chapter shows a sample report of current base rates Use any of the reports available through this option to see what the low usage and high usage rates are and what the low high boundary is for each statistic in the categories mentioned earlier When configuring for billing you should obtain these reports to help you determine which rates to set or adjust If you are setting rates for many of the server usage activities you should also use the report of current rates as an extension of the Billing Worksheet marking it up to show the rates for all the various server usage activities desired Billing Worksheet Complete one Billing Worksheet for each line group For all rates except Base Rates specify the Low rate the High rate and the Boundary the point at which the High rate applies A sample Billing Worksheet is shown in Figure 11 2 and Figure 11 3 A blank worksheet is located in Volume 2 of this manual Note The Billing Worksheet has two pages Be sure you complete both pages when working on Billing Rates Mailbox Accesses There are two types of mailbox access that you can bill for logins and greets number of times greeting was played and you can set a low usage rate high usage rate and a low high boundary for each type The two types are shown on the worksheet and in Table 11 2 at the end of this section The rates you set for mailbox access apply to all calls through the specified port lin
200. ing in The server superuser can set the period between password changes and the period for displaying warnings e f you enter your password incorrectly the server allows you another attempt to enter it correctly The number of attempts allowed before the server locks the user ID is set by the server superuser The default is five attempts If a user ID should become locked only the server superuser can unlock it No indication is given to a user on lockout Note The number of bad login attempts is counted from midnight to midnight of the following day and is cleared and restarted each midnight e The first time you log in the server requires you to change the temporary password assigned by the server superuser at the time you were added to the server e Ifyou lose or forget the password for the server superuser account there is a procedure to bypass the login sequence Contact your technical support representative Refer to Volume 2 of this manual for more information Permission Categories You can use any of six permission categories to establish privileges for each user ID These categories and users are defined in Table 10 1 Table 10 1 _ FPSA Permission Category Category Description 1 Unlimited access to all console menus and all server resources synonymous with server superuser access Unlimited access to all console menus and QNX shell except cannot run hardware maintenance from hard drive See System Ad
201. interval is your server s busiest period during the interval reported LOWEST ATB_SEC The least total amount of time during which ATB conditions occurred in a fifteen minute interval for the period reported It does not mean the shortest single interval during which an ATB occurred This is the period of slowest traffic for your server during the interval reported Figure 12 3 Sample Group Usage Summary Report gt gt gt Acme Products System lt lt lt TOTAL LINE GROUP ATB SUMMARY REPORT Mon Apr 8 1995 2 29 pm 11 08 95 8hr 17hr dayl day5 GROUP NAME ATB_ SEC ATB_ CNT PERCENT T VMemo 200 100 5 5 2 Pager 100 50 3 5 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 160 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 3 Sales 300 150 8 4 Eng 400 200 11 5 Exec 100 50 3 6 Mktg 200 100 5 Reading the Group Usage Summary Report The Group Usage Summary Report see sample in Figure 12 3 displays the line groups by number then gives the total seconds the total number of times and the total percentage of time that an ATB condition occurred in that line group for the entire period reported This report is much less specific than the standard report but it allows the server administrator to see at a glance which line group received the most traffic for the specified time interval In addition by comparing the ATB count with the ATB seconds count the server administrator can determine the average duration of the
202. ion Release 7 0 e NuPoint Fax e Integrations NP Forms e NP Net Digital Network e NP Receptionist Note NP Receptionist and NuPoint Agent can work in the same line group as the NuPoint Voice application depending on your integrations Most other optional features use different line groups Use by the Hearing I mpaired Almost all the functions and capabilities in a standard NuPoint Messenger server are available to hearing impaired mailbox owners and callers NP TDD is an optional feature that you can configure at any NuPoint Messenger server site where a TDD machine is installed Modifiers These characteristics of NuPoint Messenger server software are common to all applications By configuring the modifiers the capabilities and behavior of the application can change Most modifiers are introduced in the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Types of Configuration The NuPoint Messenger server has two different kinds of configuration online and offline configuration Offline configuration handles server settings that cannot be changed immediately This includes setting up line groups Online configuration includes the remainder of server settings that can be modified at any time However since many offline and online configuration settings work together there are two kinds of online configuration as well the active and the inactive configuration The active configuration is the online configuration currently in use and any ch
203. ion only mailbox whose prompts are changed on time or usage sensitive basis Scrolling interface An input menu on the server maintenance console where data is entered one line at a time You are prompted for each item by the server Contrast with full screen interface Serial port A physical interface to a serial data connection Also see Serial port index Serial port index A numeric pointer to the serial port number to be used by an application This number can be 0 don t use 1 or 2 Each serial port can then be assigned to a device name Serial port number A number assigned to a serial port index that points to a device name For a CPU serial port the number 1 or 2 will refer to term1 or term2 For a serial port hardware card the numbers 1 through 32 refer to names cti1 through cti32 Server The NuPoint Messenger server both hardware and software used to run NuPoint Voice Server administrator See Administrator Server greeting Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 208 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Initial greeting heard by callers who dial into a voice processing system Server maintenance console The video display monitor and keyboard the terminal connected to the server Server superuser When FPSA is activated the only person who has unlimited access to all server menus This classification is the widest level of access Shared extension mailbox A kind of tree ma
204. ional Access Code Country code Area City code lplus dialing Area City code is dialed with Local Telephone Number N Telephone number Loop back Test Mailbox Attendant s extension 0 Pre DN or attendant xfer string S Supports pager systems 3 TEST DEMO 4 OUTSIDE LINE 7 SKYPAGER 8 800 PAGER 11 FaxInternal 15 NP View Pager Group 24 End of Group Info Pager Systems Pager System 3 Pager Name TEST DEMO Access code t9t1 Hold time 5 Pager System 4 Pager Name OUTSIDE LINE Access code t9t Hold time 5 Pager System 7 Pager Name SKYPAGER Access code t9t18007597243 Hold time 5 Pager System 8 Pager Name 800 PAGER Access code t9t18009464646 g Hold time 5 Pager System 11 Pager Name FaxInternal Access code t Hold time 5 Pager System 15 Pager Name NP View Pager Access code Hold time 2 Wakeup configured Port ctil RS 232 Serial Port application Centrex SMARTCARD TABLE host card port name cpu owner intr addr il ctil R3051 Centrex N A 324 1 1 cti2 R3051 EMPTY N A 324 1 1 cti3 R3051 MESA NET N A 324 1 dL cti4 R3051 MESA NET N A 324 The following optional features are enabled Receptionist NP WakeUp Networking Cut Through Pager NP Forms NuPoint Fax Call Detail Recorder copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 184 Mitel NuPoint Mess
205. itiate a gather as needed single gather or you can configure the server to runa gather automatically automatic gather Automatic gathers can be run weekly monthly or twice monthly In a busy server a gather can slow down call processing so it is best to schedule an automatic gather or request a gather in the early morning hours when server resources are not in use processing calls Unsuccessful Gathers It is possible for a gather to be unsuccessful The most likely cause would be a power loss during the process since gather can take from several minutes to several hours to complete depending on the size of the server and volume of calls If a gather fails you should 1 Perform a server backup to diskette to save the previous billing data file that was created during the unsuccessful gather see the NuPoint Messenger Installation and Service Manual for directions 2 Perform another gather The information needed for the current billing is now divided between the current and previous billing data files that are on the hard disk 3 Runa Previous Billing Report from the hard disk This shows what was billed during the last billing cycle which gives you a starting point for determining current charges 4 Run both a Billing Report and a Previous Billing Report from the hard disk then combine them to determine the correct bill for each mailbox Billing Reports After the server performs a gather the statistics and charges tha
206. ive partitions has been consumed and how much is still available Hard disks in the server are partitioned into multiple logical or virtual drives The report fields are the same as in the Total Statistics Report Figure 12 16 shows a Sample Virtual Total Statistics Report Figure 12 16 Sample Virtual Drive Statistics Report SYSTEM STATISTICS Fri Apr 21 12 18 03 1995 Total Free Used Virtual Drive 5 Message Numbers 3750 3560 0 Speech Blocks 16000 13056 18 Virtual Drive 6 Message Numbers 3750 3570 0 Speech Blocks 16000 13060 18 Virtual Drive 7 Message Numbers 3750 3552 0 Speech Blocks 16000 13056 18 Virtual Drive 8 Message Numbers 3750 3573 0 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 173 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Speech Blocks 16000 13065 18 Total for all Virtual Drives Message Numbers 90000 85821 5 Speech Blocks 384000 313264 18 Account Sectors 57344 54208 5 Sates Sectors Speech Blocks Prompt Vid Total Free Used Total Free Used english J 6000 4894 18 13365 11759 12 Calls answered since Fri Apr 21 1995 12 07 pm 16 System I nformation The System Information Report see sample in Figure 12 17 contains the serial numbers of all disks in the server all optional features loaded and the number of hours of speech storage based on 18 kbps speech quality The hour port and link locks indicate the maximum number of hours ports and lin
207. ks that the current server can support The UI Unified Integration lock lists the number of ports allowed for a Smartcard or multiple serial port card used with an integration If you have the NP View optional feature installed this report lists the number of session and client licenses Figure 12 17 Sample System Information Report SYSTEM INFORMATION Fri Dec 1 09 59 37 1995 Thu Oct 26 14 19 45 PDT 1995 NuPoint Voice NuPoint Fax Release 6 00 Rev A23 Sat Oct 21 15 21 58 1995 Wed Nov 22 14 10 43 PST 1995 NuPoint Voice NP Net Async Release 6 00 Rev A23 03 Wed Nov 22 10 09 45 1995 POE GR DISK INFORMATION X R OR DISK SERIAL CONFIG SPEECH ACCOUNTS ID NUMBER CAPACITY TYPE Messages Mailboxes etc 0 0 1234 2049 MB T 240 Hours 57344 Account Records O 1 1234 2049 MB 1 240 Hours 57344 Account Records Redundant Drives Lock 8 System hours 40 Hour Lock 0 Port Lock 0 Link Lock 0 UI Lock 0 NP View session licenses 100 NP View client licenses 300 NP View remote licenses 300 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 174 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Verify Reports There are two verify reports that record the results of the verify program differently You can review the results from the Offline Verify from the Reports Menu You can review the results from the Online Verify from the System Verify Menu There are two types of Online System Verify reports Speech and Records If you compare the r
208. l NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Special Mailboxes The following sections describes the types of special mailboxes listed at the beginning of the chapter There are 13 types of special mailboxes Administrator s mailbox Attendant s mailbox Broadcast Chain Check In and check out mailboxes Greeting Only mailboxes Guest mailboxes NP OnDemand templates Rotational mailboxes Shared extension mailboxes a variation of a tree mailbox Template mailboxes NP Forms Tree bulletin board mailboxes Administrator s Mailbox The initial software installation contains an administrator s mailbox that has these special privileges Contains the company greetings Can create or edit master distribution lists that can be used by any mailbox owner in the server with an appropriate FCOS Can add mailboxes delete mailboxes and change mailbox configuration by phone For more information about the administrator s mailbox see the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Attendant s Mailbox The initial software installation also contains an attendant s mailbox This mailbox supplies these functions Its greeting is the message of the day which is stored only in the attendant s mailbox A customized site tutorial a form of greeting can be recorded from the attendant s mailbox When outside callers access the message center they are prompted to enter a mailbox number or wait Callers who wait are then pro
209. l S e To resume scrolling Ctrl Q e To discontinue the report Ctrl C Procedures Use the following procedures to generate or view reports These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number Report Generation CP 3375 Run a Billing Report CP 3366 Run a Complete Summary Report CP 5305 Run a Fax Group Usage Report CP 5316 Run a Group Usage All Trunks Busy Report CP 5306 Run a Line Group Usage Report CP 5307 Run a Line Usage Report CP 5309 Run a Logfile Report CP 5302 Run a Mailbox Blocked Report CP 4367 Run a Mailbox Data Report CP 4372 Run a Message Usage Report CP 5308 Run a Phonebook Report CP 4374 Run a Previous Billing Report CP 4368 Run a Speech Usage Report CP 5310 Run a System Information Report CP 1340 Run a System Phoneline Exceptions Report CP 4369 Run a Termination Report CP 3370 Run a Total Statistics Report CP 5311 Run a Virtual Drive Statistics Report CP 5312 Run Mailbox Statistics Reports CP 4373 Run NP Receptionist Reports CP 4371 Show or Edit the History File CP 5304 View the Hard Disk Operational Parameters CP 5313 Logfiles The logfile is a record of any detected module or server errors and the date and time of any server resets Each module maintains its own copy of the logfile resulting in a delay in a request to display the logfile while the server produces the report The larger the report becomes the longer the delay in the viewing process becomes The default is that the logfile is s
210. lable beginning with 1 When you specify that mailboxes beginning with a certain digit can be variable length those mailboxes can be as short as one digit 9 or as long as 11 99999999999 This allows you over 11 billion different mailboxes beginning with 9 You cannot of course configure 11 billion mailboxes since that would exceed the storage capacity of the disk Hotel installations can make good use of variable length mailboxes It is convenient for a guest s mailbox number telephone number and room number to be the same but this is impossible to achieve with fixed length mailbox numbers and a single line group To understand why realize that most hotel dialing plans assign three digit numbers to rooms on floors one through nine and four digit numbers to rooms on floor 10 and above If the mailbox for room 111 matched the phone number the mailbox for room 1111 could not Variable length mailboxes allow you to keep all mailboxes in a single line group and still assign mailboxes that match room and telephone numbers Configuration Considerations If you configure variable length mailboxes mailbox owners must modify their interactions in these ways e When addressing a message to multiple recipients they must enter a pound sign after each mailbox number that is variable length or wait for the server to prompt for the next recipient s mailbox number Note If mailbox owners enter a pound sign after a mailbox number tha
211. lacement Note You cannot use the third message waiting type for the Pager application because it can only be used for the Centrex message waiting type By setting up two message waiting types as pagers each with a primary and an alternate number your mailbox can be configured to contact up to four pagers or four message delivery numbers or any combination of the two Message waiting type 1 and message waiting type 2 both can have a primary pager number and an alternate pager number When you designate two message waiting types as pagers both are activated The alternate pager numbers however are only activated if the primary pager numbers do not get a successful response If you want to use one pager number as a primary and one as a backup and no other message waiting function then set up one primary and one alternate pager number for example through just the first message waiting type parameter The alternate pager numbers can also be used to assign a second frequency and or interval to the same pager number The pager frequency is the maximum number of times that the server attempts to notify the mailbox owner of an unplayed message if each page is successful The pager interval is the number of minutes that the server waits before re paging when the previous page was successful If you want the server to place a page twice five minutes apart then if the message still has not been played to page the mailbox owner three times at 30
212. lank worksheet is located in Volume 2 of this Manual 2 Create a line group with one or more lines to be used as an outdialer port If your PBX only allows a message waiting indicator to be turned off by the same extension that turned it on you can still configure a multi line group if needed for heavy traffic volumes The NuPoint Messenger server uses the correct port to turn off message waiting indicators for specific extensions 3 Enter the information at the server maintenance console All configuring of the DTMF to PBX message waiting indicators is PBX dependent If your PBX allows users to turn the message indicators of other users on and off then the proper coding can usually be found in the PBX users guide Otherwise consult the PBX operating manual or your PBX vendor for the necessary codes The DTMF to PBX Message Lights application menu prompts for specific sections of the dial strings The dial strings are dialed out in the following order PBX special access code Pre DN on or off string after dial tone confirmation Directory number Peo NM gt Post DN on or off string followed by a wait for dial tone Figure 5 1 Sample DTMF to PBX Message Lights Worksheet Line Group Information All server ports are assigned to line groups Each line group is then assigned to a single application and any configuring that is done for that application applies to every port in the line group The number of ports in each line group
213. lbox it is usually easier to let the mailbox owners create and maintain their own lists When mailbox owners are given the capability to create and use their own distribution lists the server plays the appropriate prompts and options in the User Options Menu Besides adding and deleting members mailbox owners can review the members of a list and record a spoken name for it to serve as a confirmation when addressing messages to the list A server administrator can control whether or not a mailbox owner can review or modify distribution lists Turning off both capabilities can be useful for broadcast mailboxes while turning off the modify capability can be useful in service bureau environments in which the service bureau maintains the lists for the customers Mailbox owners address messages to their distribution lists by pressing a 0 zero before the list number for example 015 to address a message to distribution list 15 If feature bit 036 is enabled the sender receives a receipt listing which recipients have and have not listened to the message Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 87 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Master Lists Master lists are useful when more than one person must send messages to the same group of people A master list is a line group specific distribution list that you can define in the administrator s mailbox for that line group There can be up to 99 master lists All mai
214. lbox owners who call in on that particular line group can use a master list by pressing 00 before the list number for example 009 to address a message to master distribution list 9 or 0025 for master list 25 A master list defined for one line group is not necessarily a distribution list for another line group They can share master lists if they share the same administrator s mailbox Although you can create master distribution lists over the phone it is usually easier to use the server maintenance console due to the size of some lists It is often necessary to add newly created mailboxes to one or more master list You must use the phone to log in to the administrator mailbox and record spoken names for master distribution lists Distribution Lists and Special Mailboxes Several types of special function mailboxes use distribution lists to accomplish their purposes These include e Tree and rotational mailboxes e Broadcast message mailboxes e Broadcast password mailboxes e Broadcast greeting mailboxes e Broadcast name mailboxes Tree rotational and broadcast message mailboxes all use distribution list 1 to define child or recipient mailboxes For tree and rotational mailboxes the order of child mailboxes in the distribution list can affect what callers hear Broadcast greeting name and passcode mailboxes use distribution list 9 to identify the recipients of the broadcasts Using list 9 for these feature
215. lbox Owners e Mailbox Creation and Modification e Worksheets e Classes of Service e Greetings e Distribution Lists e Other Configuration Parameters e Unplayed Messages and Receipts e Types of Mailboxes e Outdial Billing Overview Mailboxes are the user component of a server Every server user has at least one mailbox and the server administrator must make a number of configuration decisions that affect mailboxes Some configuration is server wide and has been discussed in the previous application chapters This chapter describes different mailbox configuration options and how to do them Procedures You can perform the following procedures to configure mailboxes These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number Distribution Lists copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 76 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Distribution Lists Configuration Allow Broadcasting to a Broadcast Mailbox Configure a Mailbox for Distribution Lists Configure for Name and Greeting Broadcast Create a Master Distribution List Create or Modify a List for Mailbox Owners Delete a Distribution List Delete a Member from All Distribution Lists Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 77 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Nest a Distribution List or Prevent Nesting View All Lists Containing a Specified Member View Members of a Single List Gre
216. lbox in the system Mailbox Data Report option e View comprehensive details about mailbox activity that is helpful for debugging mailbox configuration Mailbox Dump option You can also obtain a summary report about disk speech usage for a given mailbox This report shows the number of messages played unplayed and urgent message receipts and the recorded name and greetings for the mailbox A report option allows you to obtain the total disk usage for a range of mailboxes Any of these options presents a report that you can have displayed at the server maintenance console or printed at a console printer For sample reports and detailed explanations about their contents see the Reports chapter Mailbox Worksheets Before configuring a standard mailbox complete the Mailbox Individual Worksheet Each worksheet entry is explained in the following sections If you want to use a default value indicate that fact on the worksheet Then you will not need to select or enter any information for that parameter during reconfiguration Figure 6 4 shows a sample Mailbox Individual Worksheet A blank Mailbox Individual Worksheet is located in Volume 2 of this manual To configure a mailbox for paging message delivery or call placement see also Mailbox Configuration in the Pager Application chapter Department codes are required for some message waiting applications In addition the billing report includes the department code to allow billing
217. ld be in the call placement pager system access code If you have DID you can make a message for your own number as if it were outside the server For example if your call placement dialing plan digit is 2 and your telephone number is 555 4567 then make a message for mailbox 25554567 See the task list for procedures Volume 2 of this manual on the testing discussed in this section Successful vs Unsuccessful Outdialing The server applies specific criteria to call processing and treats an outdial as successful or unsuccessful accordingly Successful Outdialing If the server encounters speech other than a lengthy greeting after outdialing it considers the call successful copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 62 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Successful pages are retried a specified number of minutes apart the pager interval for a maximum number of times the pager frequency Paging is discontinued when any of the following occurs e The frequency number is reached e The user listens to all unplayed messages in the mailbox and logs out e The user disables paging Unsuccessful Outdialing If the server encounters a Busy or Reorder tone or a Ring No Answer condition after outdialing the call is considered unsuccessful Other examples of unsuccessful calls are if no dial tone is detected or no tone or voice greets the server after the page is made The server retries the page ac
218. le message do not clear the logfile until you have consulted with the server technician or your distributor The logfile is in the format lt sitecode gt lt m gt lt tid gt lt task_name gt lt date gt lt time gt lt error message gt lt code gt where lt sitecode gt Site code assigned to the module seen serial output only lt m gt Module on which the failure occurred lt tid gt Task id of the program reporting the problem lt task_name gt Name of the server resource lt date gt Date of the occurrence lt time gt Time at which this happened lt error message gt Type of error that has occurred lt code gt Failure code If your server is single module the module number is listed as 0 instead of 1 Failure codes are explained in the nstallation and Service Manual A Sample Logfile Report from a single module server is shown in Figure 12 1 Figure 12 1 Sample Logfile Report SYSTEM ERROR LOGFILE Thu Apr 20 17 34 39 1995 1 00151 vmnet 04 20 16 37 05 VMNET NB1 skip 0 90100000002640 1 00151 vmnet 04 20 16 37 05 VMNET set_nq rply 4 skip 0 90100000002640 1 00142 vmnet 04 20 16 39 35 VMNET NB1 skip 0 90100000002640 1 00142 vmnet 04 20 16 39 35 VMNET set_ngq rply 4 skip 0 90100000002640 1 00115 netq_age 04 20 16 39 35 NETQLIB can t send to NETO 1 00296 allocato 04 20 16 39 35 allocator Allocated usr vm bin netq to node 1 type 5 1 00105 sendvm 04 20 16 39 36 aope
219. lian British or New Zealand English French NP TDD Japanese German Korean Latin American or Mexican Spanish Mandarin Portuguese A server can have one default language and up to eleven alternate languages depending on the number and size of the hard drives For more details about the number and kinds of languages supported see the Other Classes of Service chapter NP TDD can be installed like any of the language prompts If NP TDD is installed selecting it as a response to the Default Language for Prompts parameter enables the NP TDD feature of the NuPoint Voice application in the current line group When any mailbox owner receives or makes a call through that line group NP TDD replaces voice prompts with TDD tones See NP TDD for the Hearing Impaired below for more information NP TDD for the Hearing I mpaired The NP TDD feature of the NuPoint Voice application supports telecommunications devices for the deaf TDDs With NP TDD hearing impaired mailbox owners can receive TDD generated Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 25 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 text from other users NP TDD users can be notified about messages by message waiting lights or any other message waiting indication supported by a NuPoint Messenger server just as other users can Outside callers with a TDD can call a mailbox configured for NP TDD prompts be answered by a
220. limits in the server to ensure that mailbox owners use the server appropriately Line Groups Service bureaus can provide mailbox owners with certain line groups for receiving messages while having them pick up their messages on other line groups either to control costs or to control call flow To enforce this type of usage you can use feature bits 101 109 to deny login on specific line groups callers can leave messages but are not able to log into a mailbox In this way you can also restrict access to certain information to internal ports only or to 800 number ports where the server owner must pay for connect time Mailbox Usage Depending on the number of phone lines or the storage hours available on your server or on the levels of service that mailbox owners pay for you can set LCOS parameters to control certain aspects of mailbox usage such as connect time number of messages stored or storage duration If the number of phone lines to your server is limited you can limit call duration by setting the Maximum login time parameter in each LCOS to a few minutes On the other hand if disk storage is a limiting factor you can lower both the Caller message length and User message length and set the Message count limit to a number that is equitable to all users assigned to each LCOS The amount of storage used on your server is the result of the number of messages stored and the length of storage time You can control the storage
221. long distance calls Note This limit does not apply to phone numbers entered at a server maintenance console For more information on LCOSs and limits see the Other Classes of Service chapter Action at the End of a Dial String When a mailbox is configured for message delivery the server automatically waits for a greeting If a G is erroneously included at the end of the dial string the server ignores it Noisy Switching Equipment When the server is configured to outdial a telephone number the clicks and pops of particularly noisy switching equipment could be misinterpreted as a greeting To avoid this dial the telephone number then count the number of seconds that it takes for the telephone at the other end to ring or the pager to answer Since message delivery always assumes a G at the end of the dial string put the appropriate number of pluses at the end of the pager number Answer Supervision Code in the Dial String e You may want to use the Answer Supervision L code if you have the appropriate switches or use certain cellular exchanges MTSO This is a good alternative to the Greet G code where progress tones or noise can cause the server to erroneously assume success e Answer supervision time out controls how many seconds the line card waits until issuing a time out If the line card does not detect answer supervision a ringing on the line by the number of seconds set in this exception the page is co
222. low you to duplicate the steps required to page or place a telephone call The pager dial strings consist of the characters listed in Table 4 1 Note The server always assumes a G wait for greeting as the last character in a message delivery dial string Pager System Dial Strings The server divides the characters for the sequence of events into three parts the access code Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 43 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 defined in one of the 16 pager systems the pager number and the post pager number The access code contains the part of the dial string that is stored in the online configuration The pager number and post pager number are the parts of the dial string that are stored in an individual user s mailbox configuration Assign dial strings to each section using the following structure The access code identified by the pager system index number contains the first part of the dial string necessary to reach the user s pager It is usually the part of the dial string that is common to some group of users The pager number is the balance of the dial string necessary to reach the user s pager e The post pager number is used as the data to display on a display pager Note If there is no pager or post pager dial string entered a page will not be sent Table 4 1 Pager Dial String Characters Character Explanation 0 9 Keys on a standard
223. lsed 10 PPS Stop pulsing resume sending DTMF tones Pause for one second Fourth column DTMF keys Go off hook wait for dial tone or other steady tone pager go ahead or confirmation tone for example then do next item in string Switch hook flash and wait for dial tone Greet Wait for a voice or computer tone answer Hang up go on hook Answer Supervision Wait for telephony signal from destination Use only with trunk four wire connections Start a new activity do not go off hook Ring once Go off hook do not wait for dial tone Switch hook flash no wait required Go off hook wait for dial tone JA voice pager system is being used 0 MEON lt an 002 Post DN ON or OFF String This string is sent after the directory number extension number to instruct the PBX to turn the message waiting indicator on or off at that station There is no default post DN on or off string Enter the coding if any that must be sent after the directory number to turn message waiting indicators on or off Wait for Dial Tone The default value is N If the PBX can return dial tone to the server to indicate that a message indicator has been turned on or off successfully answer Yes The server registers an error condition if dial tone is not returned and redials the appropriate dial string Enable Alternate Code The alternate code is the DTMF string that the server transmits after the pre DN on string Typically th
224. lso used when transferring a caller to a mailbox attendant s extension number The system attendant s extension consists of the PBX extension number of the live attendant or a must answer number with no mailbox plus coding that describes any subsequent steps necessary to complete the call Up to 30 characters can be entered in this field Table 2 7 Transfer Dial String Characters Character Explanation 0 9 Keys on a standard pushbutton telephone The following digits should be dial pulsed 10 PPS D Stop pulsing resume sending DTMF tones Pause for one second AD Fourth column DTMF keys E Go off hook wait for dial tone or other steady tone pager go ahead or confirmation tone for example then do next item in string Switch hook flash and wait for dial tone Greet Wait for a voice or computer tone answer Hang up go on hook Answer supervision Wait for telephony signal from destination Use only with trunk four wire connections Start a new activity do not go off hook Ring once Go off hook do not wait for dial tone Switch hook flash no wait required I 0 m oo OZ Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 T Go off hook wait for dial tone M Voice pager play the first unplayed message and update mailbox The default system attendant s extension number is 0 In
225. mbers that you do not want used for message addressing Such numbers include 911 411 5551212 and 0 NPA Database The NPA database contains area codes that are screened You can configure the database to either allow or disallow access to specific area codes For example you can restrict the mailbox to only the local NPA or restrict access to NPAs such as 900 numbers It is possible to restrict outdial access to only one NPA by setting the NPA allow disallow status to allow and creating an NPA table with only one NPA entry Remember that if you want to set any outdial restrictions for the home NPA you must enter that NPA in the table NXX Database After you specify an NPA the system asks if you want NXX screening for the specific NPA You must also set the allow disallow status for the NXX field The NXX allow or disallow setting takes priority over the NPA setting This is useful for restricting the use of an NPA to only specific NXXs The setting for the NPA in this situation is not used in determining if the call is placed Call placement is determined only by the NXX allow disallow setting The system treats the combined NPA NXX 408 415 for example in light of the NXX allow disallow setting regardless of the NPA setting Figure 8 8 Sample RCOS Worksheet Distribution Lists copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 130 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 If an RCOS is changed it is possible for a
226. me the Termination Report is run the server displays a warning that reports the number of unplayed messages in the mailbox and reminds you that generating a Termination Report at this point will not include these unplayed messages To charge only for messages that the mailbox holder has played run the Termination Report before the unplayed messages are deleted To charge for all messages received whether they were played or not check the mailbox out first then run the termination report Configuration and Usage Reports The reports discussed in this section are designed for maintaining and debugging the software configuration and operation of a server They give you information about e Application and optional feature including integration configuration e Mailbox configuration e Mailbox usage e Phoneline exceptions e Pager system parameters e The NP Receptionist optional feature reports on the NP Receptionist optional feature are available only if it is installed e Authorized users Names and extensions of mailbox owners Phonebook Report In most cases you have a choice of report destinations as a display at the server maintenance console or as output to a printer or other output device on serial port 1 or serial port 2 An exception is the Mailbox Dump Report which can only be displayed Application and Optional Feature Configuration The System Configuration Report see sample in Figure 12 26 allows you to see t
227. ministrator below 3 ccess only to system configuration menus including network onfiguration see Chapter 7 Features Class of Service M Access only to mailbox maintenance menus copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 143 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 5 ccess only to inquiry menus read only menus such as Reports Statistics and Dum l Access only to network and network related menus When FPSA is activated you can perform menu based procedures described in this manual on y if you have the appropriate permission category or categories FPSA limits access to menus based on a permission category or categories assigned to each user ID If you attempt to reach an unauthorized menu the server responds Permission denied Each server menu also has one or more permission categories associated with it When you assign permission categories to each user make sure that the combination is sensible For example category 1 gives access to the entire server so there is no need to assign any other permission categories in addition Categories 3 and 6 together give permission for all system configuration menus Login Incorrect or Permission Denied If your user ID is invalid or you enter it incorrectly or if you enter your password incorrectly the server displays login incorrect and the login sequence halts If you have exceeded the allowed number of login attempts or if you try to reach a me
228. mmon carrier calling card You also want to allow unbilled NuPoint Fax deliveries and unbilled paging calls The mailbox owner s billing number is 103 444 9801 To do this you 1 Configure indexes and access codes such as Access code Dial String Outdial type Outdial System Name T 9 T 103330 G Call place Sprint T Internal T T Paging 2 Set the appropriate mailbox configuration parameters as shown in Figure 6 13 Figure 6 13 Outdial Billing Configuration The mailbox owner would dial a number such as Call placement digit Destination number 8 707 332 9080 The system dial number thus Carry by Sprint Destination telephone number Bill this number 9 10330 707 332 9080 103 444 9801 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 106 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 M 7 Features Class of Service Updates for RSD 3 to this chapter are provided here in PDF format Note about Acrobat Reader Chapter 7 Features Class of Service updated February 2002 8 Other Classes of Service A class of service differentiates privileges and functions for mailboxes Chapter 7 discusses the Features Class of Service FCOS which controls the features in mailboxes This chapter discusses three classes of service e Limits Class of Service LCOS controls time and storage parameters within mailboxes such as the number of messages the mailbox can store as well as the set of Prompts
229. mpted to leave a name and a message These unaddressed messages are stored in the attendant s mailbox For more information about the attendant s mailbox see the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Broadcast Mailboxes With a broadcast mailbox any caller can send a single message to multiple mailboxes In addition mailbox owners can send names and greetings to other mailbox owners This capability is particularly useful for disaster recovery or overflow mailboxes Broadcast mailboxes other than copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 94 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 broadcast message mailboxes can also send a message waiting status to multiple mailboxes To illustrate use of a broadcast message mailbox suppose the manager of a company health club wants club members to know about an upcoming tournament The manager logs in to his or her mailbox and makes a message for the broadcast message mailbox The broadcast message mailbox in turn sends the message to all members mailboxes this is sometimes called the bulletin board feature In this example the server administrator assigns a Broadcast FCOS to one mailbox The server administrator then creates distribution list 01 for that mailbox including the mailbox numbers of all the club members to a maximum of 65 535 This is a useful feature if you have mailboxes accessed in different calling areas You can update the greeting for all th
230. n fail reslt Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 157 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 7 rcrd 000000000000000 Statistics Reports The server can produce many types of statistics reports as shown in Table 12 1 You can request reports for any or all parts of the most recent seven days activity Standard reports for each statistic show the resource usage in 15 minute increments The server administrator has the option of generating a summary report where one set of data is generated for the entire time period Table 12 1 Types of Statistics Reports Available Report i Description All Trunks Busy Statistics Shows the number of times in a specified period that Group Usage every port within a line group was busy and the total number of seconds that this condition occurred within that time period You can display data for a single line group or for a range of line groups Line Group Usage Statistics Gives the number of seconds that an individual port was busy and the number of calls received by that port within a chosen time period You can display data for a single port or for a range of ports This report is similar to Line Usage Statistics except it is at the line group level Line Usage Statistics This report shows the number of seconds during which individual ports were busy and how many calls each line received over a specified reporting period Mailbox Statistics
231. ndex 0 Code eng ID Harper Maryjane Day_treat 2 Night _treat 2 Fcos 44 Lcos I Gcos Ncos 1 Rcos Rot index 0 Rot period 0 OffSys index 1 Rot start ss intern index 11 Billed index 0 NoBill index 0 Bill number Dial order bn Attend Xfers 2 Email Xfers 0 Msg speech g 0 Grt speech g 0 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 189 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 wkup defined N wkup index 0 T zone offset 0 Contents Motd_seq Caller_msgs Sent_urg_msgs Receipt Net_urg mlen Net_sent_node Fax_msg_ rcvd Fax msg dlvd Fax page _rcvd Greet_count Mobile logins Recpt_complt Recpt_msgs Clr connect Fax disk _use Net_sent_mlen 267 Net_node_mlen 267 Ww OOrFGVCCOUO wkup freq 0 wkup_intvl 0 wkup number wkup enabled N wkup message 0 Vac Sequence 75 Motd played N User_msgs 15 Sent_cpx_msgs 0 Sent_fdx_msgs 0 Wakeups 0 Pages 0 Sent_to_node 13 Urg_to node 0 Net_msgs_ rcv 44 Net_urg rcv 1 Net_send_nurg 0 Net_send_rcep 13 Fax_msg_ sent 0 Fax _page sent 0 Fax page dlvd 0 Fax_undlvd 0 Successlogins 26 Recpt_calls 0 Msg Delivery 0 Recpt_busy 0 Recpt_rna 0 Recpt_attend 0 User connect 654 Callp _connect 0 Disk_use 20441 Net_rcvd_mlen 0 Net_rcvd_urg 0 Net_recip mlen 267 Net_node_urg 0 Text_msg_cnt 0 Message Queues TYPE COUNT TOTAL HEAD TAIL TYPE COUNT Free 63 60 59 Unplayed
232. ne group greeting feature bit 160 If a caller exits one mailbox the server requires reentry of the access code before allowing further progress through the server You can also use FCOSs to completely deny login on specific line groups feature bits 101 109 or ensure that mailboxes cannot receive messages when the call is received on a specific line group feature bits 111 119 Telephone Answering Outside callers can abuse access to a server during a telephone answering call by trying to break into the dialed mailbox or access other features By correctly setting the line groups and FCOSs in your server you can control the feature set available during an answering session You can force the termination of telephone answering sessions after callers leave a single message by setting the line group to not allow multiple messages for outside callers For Greeting Only mailboxes you can have the server hang up immediately after playing the greeting feature bit 062 call the mailbox attendant after the greeting bit 063 or call the mailbox user after the greeting bit 064 By customizing an FCOS to contain feature bit 004 but not contain bit 005 Outside caller functions and Play outside caller menu prompts respectively you can allow knowledgeable users to access server functions while not letting other callers know that the functions are available Feature bit 137 Caller must enter access code can restrict outside callers from leavin
233. ne how long various types of messages remain in a mailbox If the value for Absolute Message Retention is less than the values for both or either the Played and Unplayed message retention settings it overrides those parameters LCOSs and Automatic PurgingThe server runs an automatic purge every 24 hours at midnight The server checks the message retention limits in the LCOS in each mailbox then purges any messages that are at or over those limits For example if the played message retention is eight hours and a message was played at noon it stays in the system for 12 hours after it was played until it is automatically purged at midnight If the message was played at 10 p m it stays in the system for 26 hours because it does not reach the message retention limit by the first purge The age of an unplayed message is calculated from the time it is left in a mailbox If you set very short retention limits for unplayed messages advise users to check messages at least once a day Mailbox Retention Sets how long a mailbox can remain on the server before it is automatically deleted Enter Number of days from 0 through 255 0 for no limit Default 0 no limit Played Message Retention Sets how long a played message can remain in a mailbox before it is deleted by automatic purging Enter Number of hours from 1 through 8760 1 year O for no limit a period to prevent automatic purging Default 672 hours 28 days Unplayed
234. ne the configuration of mailbox passcodes for more complete information see the Server Security chapter Minimum and Maximum Passcode Length Minimum and maximum passcode length sets the range for the number of digits a passcode can be Enter the minimum number of digits that constitute a valid passcode for users of this line group The minimum passcode length can be any number from 4 through 10 The default value is 4 This means no user can enter a new passcode shorter than 4 digits If you want users to have longer passcodes for security reasons then you can specify a larger minimum length Enter the maximum number of digits that constitute a valid passcode for users of this line group The maximum passcode length can be any number from 4 through 10 The default value is 10 If you leave the maximum passcode length at the default 10 then all passcodes can be no longer than 10 digits You cannot enter a value greater than 10 and users cannot enter a passcode longer than 10 digits Passcode Trip Count Passcode Trip Period These two entries set the parameters for the passcode break in warning which is a server security feature The default values for the passcode trip count and the passcode trip period are 5 and 24 This means that a warning is issued to a mailbox if someone attempts to enter an incorrect passcode for that mailbox at least 5 times the passcode trip count within a 24 hour period the passcode trip period The pass
235. ned errors 0 message s fixed Verify virtual speech drive 35 Verifying master control sector Verifying transient speech Note on 1 Previously truncated to length 0 Summary of Speech File System Status TOTAL USED FULL Number of Transient Pointer Sectors Oea O0ae 5 Number of Transient Speech Blocks 003e80 ffffffffO0a6d 174 transient message s verified 1 message s contained errors 1 message s fixed 2 message s truncated to length 0 1 truncated message s found ol 104465 Billing Reports You can run any of five billing reports e Current Billing Rates e Billing Report e Mailbox Blocked Report Blocked Billing Report e Previous Billing Report e Termination Report Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 178 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Current Billing Rates This report see sample in Figure 12 21 shows you the current rates for various statistics such as base rates and pager calls through the Report Rates option in the Billing Menu Remember that you can set rates only for FCOSs 1 through 64 any FCOS higher than 64 is billed at the rates for FCOS 64 Refer to the Billing Tasklist Volume 2 of this manual for a procedure to run the Base Rates Report Figure 12 21 Sample Base Rates Report BASE RATES 1 UNLIMITED 000 00 2 FULL GUEST 000 00 3 RESTRICTED 000 00 4 CHECK IN 000 00 5 CHECK OUT 000 00 6 GREE
236. ner can enter for a target telephone number You can set the message delivery paging and message phone lengths to seven digits to limit calls to the local service area or 10 or 11 digits to allow for long distance calls FPSA and Server Administration In the hands of a trained and responsible administrator or technician server administration functions can be used to provide convenient and full featured service to mailbox owners and callers and to keep the server functioning smoothly In the wrong hands the same functions can be used to take over mailboxes disrupt service and even shut down the server Security for the administration function is extremely important However when Functionally Partitioned System Administration FPSA is activated and configured server security is assured because access can be restricted to authorized persons only See Functionally Partitioned System Administration later in this chapter for more details about FPSA Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 139 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Console The server maintenance console is the primary point of entry for configuration and administration and therefore one of the most critical factors in security console access is protected by a login sequence The server requires a user ID and a password that verifies a user before allowing access to any menu User ID A user ID is a unique representation of a person
237. nes how it is used For example FCOS 15 Tree or a customized equivalent enables a tree mailbox FCOS 17 Rotational Mailboxes or a customized equivalent enables branching to another mailbox FCOS 6 Greeting Only or a customized equivalent enables the mailbox to give the caller information then hang up FCOS 1 Unlimited allows the mailbox to play a greeting Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 104 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 then allows a caller to leave a message Use either one of the defaults described in the Feature Class of Service chapter or a customized FCOS that includes all the applicable feature bits List A tree mailbox must have distribution list 01 whose members are the mailboxes that are branched to when a caller presses the associated digit Members Identify all child mailboxes as members of distribution list 01 in the tree mailbox Greeting recorded You must record a greeting in the tree mailbox to tell callers which digit to press for the desired mailbox You should also record appropriate greetings or messages in the child mailboxes Billing Outdials to an Account or Long Distance Carrier You can configure a mailbox so that outdials from that mailbox are charged to the individual mailbox owner or to another billing account that you specify This billing account can be a telephone credit card a service bureau account or any other billing account You can also specif
238. nging from simple to complex depending on which groups you include or exclude in bitmapped GCOSs and which bitmapped GCOSs you assign to mailboxes As an example suppose that a scientist directs an experiment using target subjects and control subjects The target subjects and control subjects do not communicate with each other but do communicate with the scientist The scientist communicates with every subject Using bitmapped GCOSs you can put the target subjects in a GCOS with one group the control subjects in a another GCOS with a different group and the scientist in a third GCOS with both groups The results are shown below Tenant GCOS GroupsinGcos Directing scientist 3 1 2 Target subjects 4 1 Control subjects 5 2 Figure 8 3 diagrams this message exchange scheme Figure 8 3 Grouping Scheme Using Bitmapped GCOSes Bitmapped GCOSs work well when the mailboxes in your system have different communication needs Some mailboxes require universal communication while others should be tightly restricted This is the more flexible more complex of the two methods If you want to use a bitmapped GCOS other than default GCOS 1 you must define it before assigning it to mailboxes Affinity Group GCOSs Affinity group GCOSs work well when mailboxes require communication within particular groups but not across groups This is the simpler of the two methods all mailboxes that have the same affinity group
239. nizes the information that is necessary for configuring the programmable interface You can use ASCII codes in any of the strings described in the following paragraphs Table 5 3 lists the valid ASCII codes that can be used The following descriptions can help you to complete this worksheet Initialization String This string is sent to the PBX to notify it that the server is ready to send message waiting indicator requests Reply String After the initialization string is sent the server waits for the PBX to return this reply string before sending message indicators requests Pre DN On String This string is sent before the directory number extension number to instruct the PBX to turn the message waiting indicator on at that station Pre DN Off String Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 73 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 This string is sent before the directory number extension number to instruct the PBX to turn the message waiting indicator off at that station Table 5 3 RS 232 Message Waiting Indicators Interface Codes Code Explanation Ar carriage return An Inew line t tab Nb backspace N form feed N backslash y double quotes lquestion mark Jno string needed Post DN On String Enter the coding if any that must be sent after the directory number to turn message waiting indicators on There is no default post DN on strin
240. nsidered a failure This time out can be set between 0 and 255 seconds where 0 means no time out period is enforced wait forever Call Placement Considerations This section covers specifics applicable only to call placement Remember that you must set the outdial indexes and the call placement pager access type parameters in the user s mailbox configuration to enable call placement Changing Mailbox Information You may want to alter the following mailbox information to use call placement e FCOS e LCOS e RCOS e Call placement pager access type Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 54 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Changing an FCOS Definition To use call placement you must add feature bit 110 Give make to telephone number to an existing FCOS or create a new one with this feature in it Changing an LCOS Definition The limits listed in Table 4 5 control call placement You might need to change the LCOS assigned to the call placement mailbox configuration accordingly Table 4 5 Call Placement Limits Limit Unit Default Valid Values Ring No Answer retry limit no of retries 10 1 255 Ring No Answer retry interval minutes 60 1 255 l Busy retry limit no of retries 10 1 255 Busy retry interval minutes 10 1 255 Phone length digits 7 3 11 Count no of messages 73 1 73 Length minutes 5 0 60 RNA Retry Limit This limit determines the maximum
241. ntation Guide gives suggestions and recommendations on preparing for a NuPoint Messenger server installation The nsta lation and Service Manual for your system provides installation procedures Task List Task lists appear in Volume 2 To use a task list start with a principal task shown in boldface to configure a new system Each task listed is described in more detail in a procedure If you want to perform other tasks on a system that is already configured look up the task you want to perform in the task list Procedures Each reference chapter in Volume 1 contains a list by title and number of related Procedures CPs The collection of those configuration CPs follows the task lists in Volume 2 the number of a CP does not indicate a sequence of performance Follow the steps in the CPs to accomplish desired tasks A reference list in each CP contains pointers to supplemental information such as other procedures other manuals menu maps and so forth copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Worksheets Volume 1 includes information about completing worksheets which helps you perform procedures Volume 2 includes blank worksheets You many need to complete a worksheet before you begin performing the steps in a CP Navigation Aids Volume 1 contains a glossary of NuPoint Messenger telecommunications and telephony terms Volume 2 contains menu maps or road m
242. nu outside your permission category or categories the server does not let you continue When the number of login attempts is exceeded the server locks the user ID of the person attempting to log in The system superuser must unlock the user ID through the FRSA menu before a locked out user can log in If access to a menu is allowed the system superuser can modify permission categories of the person denied access also through the FPSA Menu If the system superuser encounters the login incorrect message he or she should follow the password bypass procedure described in the Task List in Volume 2 of this manual Users can receive permission denied messages when choosing a menu option that they are not permitted to access Permission categories must be changed for users to access menu items that generate this message System Superuser The system superuser is the only person with unlimited access to all server resources and all menus This individual is the only one who can perform all the activities described in this manual including these FPSA activities e Add a user to the server e Delete a user from the server e Reset a user s password e Change permission categories e Configure password parameters e Configure and manage the Audit Trail see below The user ID rootis the only server superuser copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 144 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 CAUTI
243. number 6457GV Post pager number None Joe is so efficient that he only needs to be paged once per message The appropriate pager Mailbox Worksheet entries are a Pager Frequency Pager Interval 0 Message Delivery No Message Delivery Example Message delivery configuration is usually simpler than paging configuration Here is an example Anita Pacheque is a contractor who works off site When she is not working at her office she Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 59 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 wants the server to try to reach her at home Her office phone number is 415 555 6836 and her home number is 408 555 0921 She wants the server to try her office number three times with calls that are 10 minutes apart then to try her home twice with 30 minutes between calls When test calls are made it takes five seconds for her office telephone to ring after dialing is completed and three seconds for her home telephone to ring The dial string to call her office is Caller Action Dial String Wait for dial tone T Tell the PBX that you want an outside line 9 Wait for a dial tone to confirm that you have the outside line T Dial the office number 14155556836 Wait 5 seconds for the connection to be completed Similarly the dial string to call her home is T9T14085550921 Remember that the server automatically appends a G Greet code at the end of the pager string fo
244. number may be accessed A all D day N night Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 194 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Auth Code An authorization code usually numerical that the caller must enter before NP Receptionist rings the extension Special character codes are M enter any valid mailbox number and P enter a valid passcode A blank field means that no authorization code is required jp Redial Dflt The redial menu that is played when Redial is selected for any extension failure condition RNA The action taken when the extension rings but there is no answer R play the default Redial menu see Redial Default above A transfer to an assistance number M prompt the caller to leave a message in the mailbox BUSY The action taken when the extension is busy R play the default Redial menu A transfer to an assistance number M prompt the caller to leave a message in the mailbox REJ The action taken when call screening is in effect and the recipient rejects the call R play the default Redial menu A transfer to an assistance number M prompt the caller to leave a message in the mailbox SCREEN Indicates whether the user wants NP Receptionist to screen all outside calls Y yes N no TRUNK TYPES The following treatment types are Trunk treatment types Index Name Auth Time Auth Code Conne
245. number of times the server redials a call placement phone number when no one answers the phone on the first delivery attempt RNA Retry Interval This limit determines how often the server redials a call placement phone number when no one answers the phone on the first delivery attempt Busy Retry Limit This limit determines the maximum number of times the server redials a call placement phone number when the server detects a busy signal on the first delivery attempt Busy Retry Interval This limit determines how often the server redials a call placement phone number when the server detects a busy signal on the first delivery attempt Phone Length This limit determines the maximum number of digits users can enter for a call placement phone number Setting this limit higher accommodates long distance calls Note This limit does not apply to phone numbers entered at a server maintenance console Count The count determines the maximum number of undelivered messages for a call placement phone number per mailbox Length Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 55 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 The length determines the maximum size of a single message made for a call placement phone number If you send a message to both mailboxes and telephone numbers this limit interacts with the limit on the size of messages sent to mailboxes the shorter of the two limits overrides the longer For instan
246. number other than the default you must create the mailbox before using it Identifying the mailboxes in the NuPoint Voice application line group gives them the ability to perform their special functions but the functions are not enabled until the mailboxes are added to the server The recommended FCOS for both mailboxes is 10 VIP the LCOS is 1 Default the GCOS is 1 and the message waiting type should be whatever is available for your server Record a Company Greeting When callers reach NuPoint Voice by dialing its number they hear the administrator s mailbox greeting which is the company greeting DID callers hear the mailbox s personal greeting It is possible to record separate day and night greetings See the Mailboxes chapter for more information Test the Configuration After phone lines have been installed and you have completed all the applicable steps discussed so far test your NuPoint Voice application See the task list for the procedure in Volume 2 of this manual 3 DID NuPoint Voice Application This chapter covers e Overview of the DID NuPoint Voice application Default software configuration e DID NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet e Line group definition e Configuring the application e Using the DID NuPoint Voice application e Usage Considerations Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 28 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Overview The DID NuPoint Voi
247. o record the daily special The owner would then set the start date and Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 99 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 start time for the rotation and the length of time before the server rotates to the next mailbox 24 hours in this example Index Type Rotational Mailboxes The server assigns a sequential index to each member of the rotational mailbox s distribution list If a sorted list is created mailboxes are indexed starting with the lowest numbered mailbox If an unsorted list is created mailboxes are indexed starting with the first mailbox entered in the list The first caller reaches the first indexed mailbox the second caller reaches the second indexed mailbox and so on When the last indexed mailbox is reached the cycle starts over at the first indexed mailbox As an example of an index type rotational mailbox imagine that a veterinarian wants pet owners to hear three pet care messages over an unspecified period of time Each time pet owners call the veterinarian s number they are likely to hear a different one of the three messages In this example Figure 6 8 the veterinarian assigns FCOS 17 Rotational Mailboxes to one mailbox mailbox 781 and records a standard veterinary practice greeting for this mailbox For this mailbox the veterinarian also creates distribution list 01 containing three mailboxes mailboxes 711 713 To each of the three mailboxes
248. o the maximum 240 to allow users time to record their name and status such as Lee Smith out of the office Message Count Sets to maximum number of messages in a single mailbox When the mailbox is 80 full the user hears a Prompt to delete any unnecessary messages When the mailbox is full callers and other users cannot leave messages When users answer or forward messages and attach the original message s each attachment counts as a single message For example if the limit is 10 and one message has 9 attachments it fills the mailbox Enter Number from 0 to 73 0 prevents any messages Default 73 Messages per Billing Sets the number of messages that the mailbox can receive between billing gathers Enter Number from 1 to 9999 or leave the field blank 0 or a period means no limit Default 0 no limit User Message Length Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 111 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Sets the maximum time in minutes that another user can make give or answer a message for this mailbox When the user reaches this limit or the server detects silence the server stops recording and announces that the recording is complete Enter Minutes from 0 to 60 0 prevents any messages a period means no limit Default 5 0 minutes Caller Message Length Sets the maximum time in minutes that a caller can leave a message for this mailbox When the caller re
249. o to the sender only Outside callers must remember to announce their names if they want recipients to know who sent the message Passcode You can change the passcode in the broadcast passcode mailbox and have it transmitted to all mailboxes in the distribution This feature is enabled through feature bit 231 Passcode Broadcast Mailbox in the mailbox FCOS Multiple Mailbox Greetings Mailboxes with multiple mailbox greetings defined broadcast each individual greeting as it is created or modified and a recipient mailbox is checked to see if its FCOS has feature bit 175 Receive broadcast greeting or feature bit 179 Receive broadcast name or feature bit 232 Allow receipt of passcode broadcasts Mailboxes generating broadcast greetings that also have multiple mailbox greetings enabled can only send messages to recipient mailboxes that also have multiple mailbox greetings enabled Broadcast Message Waiting Status The server also has the ability to automatically send the message waiting status of a mailbox to a distribution list of mailboxes without sending the actual message This is useful in a business where any one of a number of people can respond to a message but only one person needs to A single response eliminates redundant answers to a message thereby raising staff productivity and satisfying the sender of the message Example of Use In a brokerage firm any of six account executives can respond to potential clients reque
250. om outside callers and from mailbox owners Outside callers can attempt to take over mailboxes that can be reached through the public switched telephone network and use them for their own applications Mailbox owners can make inappropriate use of server resources by placing long distance calls through the server overusing available storage or sending messages to mailboxes that should be off limits The server has many features that are designed to provide security at the server level and the mailbox level These features address server administration mailbox usage and access to facilities applications and information Procedures Use the following procedures to perform administration by phone These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number Server Security Configuration CP 3410 Activate or Deactivate FPSA CP 4345 Add Delete or Unlock a User ID CP 4342 Change or Reset a Password CP 4344 Configure FPSA Password Parameters CP 4339 Configure Mailbox Passcode Parameters by FCOS CP 3411 Configure Mailbox Passcode Parameters by Line Group CP 5021 Format an Audit Trail Report CP 4338 Log In or Log Out of the Server Console CP 3299 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 135 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Modify Permission Categories for Current User IDs CP 4343 Respond to Login Incorrect or Permission Denied CP 3290 Restrict Line Group Access CP 3412
251. on Mailbox Dialing Plan The available DID number block may only allow a certain range of extension numbers Ideally mailbox numbers should match the DID numbers This makes it easier for callers to remember the proper mailbox number While a mailbox owner with a single mailbox could get along fine without ever knowing his mailbox number owners of multiple mailboxes often need access to a series of mailboxes without the inconvenience of making a telephone call to each DID number This is a particularly valuable feature for mailbox owners who are traveling and call from a long distance away In all other respects you establish a DID NuPoint Voice mailbox dialing plan the same as described for NuPoint Voice For more information on the dialing plan see the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 32 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Transfers and Attendants Note Transfers involving a pre company name dial string a pre mailbox greeting dial string and a system attendant s extension generally are not used in DID applications However if the switch integrated with your installation does support these operations the following paragraphs apply Pre Company Name Dial String This string is the sequence of digits or pauses that the server inserts before playing the company greeting administrator s mailbox greeting It is generally not used in DID applications Pre Mail
252. on Release 7 0 DAY 01 HOUR 15 The data displayed immediately below refers to the hour between 3 and 4 p m on Monday 00 14 indicates that data in that column were gathered during the first fifteen minutes of the hour 15 29 refers to the second 15 minutes of the hour etc TOTAL The data for the four 15 minute intervals If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical value it means that the data have not yet been gathered For example if the report is run at 3 30 p m and the report interval is 12 15 noon to 3 p m the entries for hour 15 3 to 4 p m should be hyphens BUSY The percentage of the hour when all trunks were busy For example for Group 1 between 3 and 4 p m an ATB condition occurred for 150 seconds out of 3600 or 4 of the time ATB_SEC The total number of seconds in the time period that an ATB condition occurred ATB_CNT The number of times that an ATB condition occurred The counter is incremented when an ATB condition first occurs The ATB condition must clear then reoccur before the counter is incremented again For example if you had an ATB condition that lasted for 3 seconds the ATB SEC counter increases by 3 but the ATB_CNT counter is increased by 1 HIGHEST ATB_SEC The greatest total amount of time during which ATB conditions occurred in a fifteen minute interval for the period reported It does not mean the longest single interval during which an ATB occurred In other words this
253. on Y lor no notification N INTERNAL INDEX BILLED INDEX The index number representing the access code for internal calls The index number representing the access code for outdials to be charged to a billing account copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 186 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 NON BILLED INDEX The index number representing the access code for outdials not CALL PLACEMENT INDEX WITH CHANGE RIGHTS WITH REVIEW RIGHTS TIME ZONE OFFSET DISTRIBUTION LISTS DISTRIBUTION LISTS charged to a billing account Shows whether call placement outdials are billed B or unbilled U or treated as internal outdials I The offset in hours between the time zone in which the mailbox owner is located and the time zone in which the server is located The number s of distribution lists in this mailbox that the mailbox owner is allowed to change all indicates all lists have change rights The number s of distribution lists in this mailbox that the mailbox owner is allowed to review all indicates all lists have review rights Mailbox Search Utility Report The Mailbox Search Utility Report see sample in Figure 12 28 shows the results of a search for mailboxes meeting configuration criteria that you can specify You can select from the following configuration criteria All mailboxes e Attendant extension
254. on lists sometimes called system distribution lists which are accessible by all users of a line group In addition to addressing messages distribution lists control the actions of several special mailbox features The distribution lists in tree mailboxes and rotational mailboxes identify child mailboxes and the distribution lists in broadcast mailboxes identify the recipients of broadcast messages greetings and so forth Distribution list administration involves many parts of server administration FCOS settings allow mailbox owners to send to and receive from distribution lists LCOS settings control the maximum number of list per mailbox up to 99 and the maximum number of recipients per list up to 65 535 e GCOS settings identify which mailboxes can exchange messages e Mailbox settings control the ability of mailbox owners to review and or modify distribution lists Once you have configured mailboxes appropriately you can create distribution lists including master distribution lists and maintain them from a telephone In addition you can create distribution lists from the server console using the List Maintenance Menu Mailbox Owner Distribution Lists Mailbox owners can create up to 99 distribution lists for groups of people that they communicate with frequently Mailbox owner distribution lists are only accessible by the mailbox owner Although a server administrator can create distribution lists for any mai
255. onse to the original message Application A set of voice processing functions assigned to a line group The NuPoint Voice application is an example Attendant Person responsible for handling live telephone calls such as a switchboard operator Attendant s mailbox Special mailbox belonging to the Attendant with server wide abilities BBL paging Paging system with direct RS 232 connection from server instead of a dial up system This is an optional feature Billed outdial index See Outdial index Bitmapped group See GCOS Broadcast mailbox Mailbox address that sends simultaneous messages to a group of users without requiring use of a distribution list The distribution list assigned to the broadcast mailbox determines which users get the broadcast message Callers People who do not have voice mailboxes on the server also called outside callers Callers usually have fewer call processing options than users mailbox owners Callers can call in to extensions route their calls to other extensions and listen to greetings they may also be able to leave messages Call placement The ability to send a message to an outside telephone number instead of a mailbox Call placement pager access type Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 199 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Used with call placement this works the same as the access type for a pager It is stored in the user s mailbox
256. or specific MWI types and view the current MWI types and settings When you set the first and last mailboxes be sure that the range is a maximum of 2400 mailboxes Procedures These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number DTMF to PBX Message Waiting Indicator Configuration CP 3323 Programmable RS 232 Interface Configuration CP 3324 Pre Programmed RS 232 Interface Configuration CP 3325 Assign Message Waiting Indicators to a Mailbox CP 5031 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 66 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Compensate for Different Directory and Mailbox Numbers CP 5032 Create an RS 232 Programmable Interface String CP 5036 Define an RS 232 Serial Port CP 5038 Enable Disable Light on Requests for Successive Messages CP 5034 Send the Number of Unplayed Messages CP 5039 Set Delay times for RS 232 Message Waiting Requests CP 5040 Assign Additional Serial Ports for RS 232 Programmable Interface CP 5055 Set DTMF to PBX Protocols CP 8008 DTMF to PBX Message Waiting I ndicators This application allows the server to turn PBX message waiting indicators on and off by sending DTMF signals over the telephone lines Some PBXs allow telephone users to turn message waiting indicators on and off by dialing in a code If your PBX has this capability and if the code is not sent using proprietary signaling you may be able to configure the server to behave as if it were a Station user
257. ore modifying the mailbox This calculates the amount due without changing the statistics in the mailbox the other charges are correct at the regular billing Low Usage Rates Low High Boundary High Usage Rate The rates and boundary specified apply to all pagers in the specified pager system Message Delivery Billing Considerations The server is capable of billing both paging and message delivery on a per page basis However keep in mind that the server installation site as the calling party is responsible for any charges that accrue when paging or message delivery calls are made to the outside telephone network While pager calls are usually very short message delivery calls can be quite long Since the cost of each call depends on the time of day that it was made the duration of the call the distance to the user and the rates of the local telephone company the server makes no provisions for this aspect of the billing The billing rates structure does allow you to specify an individual rate for each pager system This rate is multiplied by the number of pages that are issued for the mailbox If you put message delivery accounts and radio pager accounts on separate pager systems you can increase the charges on the pager systems that service message delivery subscribers to compensate for any toll charges that the telephone company levies Adjusting Rates You can set adjust or leave as is a low usage rate low high boundary rate an
258. ore pluses to the string If there is a long silence before the greeting is played delete pluses from the string Pre Mailbox Greeting Dial String The NuPoint Voice application outputs this dial string immediately after receiving a valid mailbox number and before playing the mailbox s greeting This string is used only if 1 the NP Receptionist optional feature has been installed on your server and 2 employees may manually call forward their phones directly to their mailboxes In this situation an NP Receptionist port may inadvertently be connected to one of the ports that is running the message center application The pre mailbox greeting dial string forces NP Receptionist to drop the call and instructs the server to wait a designated number of seconds before playing the mailbox greeting There is no pre programmed default The same conditions apply as listed above in Pre Company Name Dial String Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 22 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Wait Prompt When the Wait prompt is enabled the server issues the prompt Please enter a mailbox number or wait immediately after the server greeting is played The default value is Y enabled To disable this prompt you must enter N In some cases you must disable the Wait prompt for any number of reasons among them e To record the company greeting administrator s mailbox greeting and the Wait prompt in the
259. orksheet Defining a Line Group All NuPoint Messenger server ports telephone lines are assigned to line groups Each line group in turn is assigned to a single application and any programming that is done for that application applies to every port in the line group The number of ports you assign to each line group depends on how heavy you expect the phone traffic to be for the particular application At the PBX or CO level all telephone lines connected to the ports of an individual line group are typically assigned to a hunt group ACD group UCD group etc to ensure that incoming calls are answered by the first port that is available for the particular application Line Group Number Each line group is represented by a discrete number Valid line group numbers are 1 through 24 The preset default for the NuPoint Voice application is 1 Group Name The group name identifies the line group s purpose For example a line group could be called Message Center There is no default group name Line s in Group You identify each line or port in a group with three identifiers which indicate a module a line card and a port on a line card Module refers to a CPU the server s main processor Modules are numbered from 1 through 4 Line cards are numbered 0 through 15 Each line card has a number of ports and you can connect one telephone line to each port Port numbering also starts at 0 and the upper limit depends on the
260. oup Usage Summary Report The Line Group Usage Summary Report see sample in Figure 12 5 displays the line groups by number then gives the total seconds the total number of times that a line in that line group was used for the entire period reported This report is much less specific than the standard report but it allows the server administrator to see at a glance which line group received the most traffic for the specified time interval Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 162 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Line Usage Report This report shows the number of seconds during which individual lines were busy and how many calls each line received over a specified reporting period You can display the data for a single line or for a range of line numbers The reporting period can be any hour or range of hours from the current day or portions of the most recent seven days Figure 12 6 shows a Sample Standard Line Usage Report Figure 12 6 Standard Line Usage Report LINE USAGE 15min REPORTFri Apr 21 1995 10 28 am 04 21 95 8hr 12hr minutes interval DAY 01 LINE 1 3 0 HOUR 08 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALLS 0 0 0 0 0 HOUR 09 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALLS 0 0 0 0 0 HOUR 10 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALLS 0 0 0 0 0 HOUR 11 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL USAGE SECONDS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALLS 0
261. ox Nested Rotational Mailboxes You can build nested rotational mailbox arrangements by making a child mailbox itself a rotational mailbox Figure 6 9 shows an arrangement in which the rotational mailbox has three child copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 100 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 mailboxes One of the child mailboxes mailbox 426 is itself a rotational mailbox with three other child mailboxes mailboxes 432 433 and 444 Figure 6 9 Sample Nested Rotational Mailboxes Rotational Mailbox Diagram Before configuring a rotational mailbox complete a Mailbox Worksheet and a Rotational Mailbox Diagram Each diagram entry is explained in the following paragraphs Pre programmed default values for entries are given where applicable If you want to use a default value indicate that fact on the diagram Then you will not need to select or enter any information for that parameter during reconfiguration Figure 6 10 shows a sample Rotational Mailbox diagram Blank worksheets and diagrams are located in Volume 2 of this manual Mailbox No Enter the number of the rotational mailbox in the topmost box on the worksheet Enter the numbers of all mailboxes that are members of the rotational mailbox s distribution list 01 child mailboxes in the remaining boxes For every mailbox number you identify in the Rotational Mailbox Diagram you should complete a corresponding Mailbox Worksheet Blank wo
262. oxes For more information about NCOSs and TCOSs respectively see The NP Net Digital Network and Enhanced SMDI Integration Manual Figure 6 4 Sample Mailbox I ndividual Worksheet Figure 6 5 Mailbox Group Worksheet Names and Greetings A mailbox owner can record a name for the mailbox If the owner does not record a name the server uses the mailbox number instead For example if you have mailbox 5731 and record Kevin Lee as your name other users hear Kevin Lee when they make messages for your mailbox If you do not record a name users hear Mailbox fifty seven thirty one Users also hear mailbox names when they play messages from other users If you get a message from an outside caller no name is used Greetings are played when callers or users reach your mailbox either by entering your mailbox number or by dialing your extension if you have an integration that supports this feature Mailbox owners can choose various types of greetings depending on their FCOS In many of the integrations that a server supports owners can choose greetings that respond to the condition under which a call has been received by the server Ring No Answer Busy or Forward Personal greetings for these three possible conditions are called conditional greetings To have the same greeting played under all conditions a user would enable the primary greetings The general greeting option allows a user to select whether to use personal or ser
263. pes use distribution list 09 By assigning the appropriate feature bits to a mailbox one two or all three of these capabilities can be performed by one mailbox Greeting A broadcast greeting mailbox requires feature bit 174 Define broadcast greeting in its FCOS All types of greetings and all names created or modified on these broadcast mailboxes will be broadcasted including e Day night company greetings for the administrator s mailbox e Message of the day e Site tutorial for attendant mailboxes e Multiple mailbox greetings Name You can record a name in the broadcast name mailbox and have it announced The mailbox is defined by the presence of feature bit 178 Define broadcast name mailbox in the FCOS Since Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 95 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 the name in the mailbox should be the name of the recipient group such as Sales Bulletin Board users must remember to state their names at the beginning of their messages This name override capability is enabled through feature bit 123 Announce broadcast mailbox name in the mailbox FCOS With this feature if you do not record a name in the broadcast mailbox the mailbox number is announced In addition answers to the messages are also broadcasted Without this feature the server announces the name of the broadcast message originator if that person is a server user In this case answers to a message g
264. play messages 050 Otherwise the make confidential message feature is useless Configuration Requirements You must assign a GCOS to every mailbox in the system A GCOS Worksheet Figure 8 6 helps you organize the information you need for assigning GCOSs to mailboxes Fill in the fields on this worksheet as described in the following paragraphs Numbering a GCOS Put the number of the default GCOS the number of an existing GCOS that you are modifying or the number of a new GCOS that you are defining in the GCOS to modify field If the GCOS is bitmapped enter 1 through 64 if the GCOS is an affinity group enter 65 through 32 000 Naming a GCOS Assign a name of your choice to identify the GCOS up to 15 alphanumeric characters in the GCOS name field You only name bitmapped GCOSs 1 through 64 Assigning Groups Put the numbers of all groups that comprise a bitmapped GCOS in the Group numbers field An affinity group GCOS does not contain groups Figure 8 6 Sample GCOS Worksheet Restriction Class of Service This section covers e NPA NXX screening process e Default RCOS e System and specific parameters e Sequence of NPA NXX Screening e Configuration requirements for system wide parameters e Configuration requirements for RCOS specific parameters e RCOSs and Distribution Lists Screening Examples Overview Restriction Class of Service RCOS is a system software feature that restricts mailbox o
265. played A match with the name dialed by a caller causes the server to play a prompt like the one shown above except that there is no single digit stated The caller must enter the entire mailbox number Suppressing Mailbox Numbers Suppressing the mailbox number means the server omits the mailbox numbers in the list of names played when there is a match with a dialed name The default is to include the mailbox number Dial by Name Database Each mailbox that can be reached by name must be configured with an FCOS that includes feature bit 92 which places users mailbox numbers in the Dial by Name database The server searches this database for entries to match a caller s input See the FCOS chapter for more information on this feature bit and how to implement FCOSs Even with all the parameters just described set a mailbox owner s name can be listed only when the mailbox owner s name is specified in the mailbox configuration Once all these requirements are met the name goes into the database as soon as you exit from the respective configuration menus To make sure there is only one mailbox per user s name you can print out a phone book for your Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 19 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 site This phone book shows the mailbox owners accessible through the Dial by Name function and their mailbox numbers Same Digit for Dial by Name and Mailbox Numbers Occ
266. pushbutton telephone The following digits should be dial pulsed 10 PPS D Stop pulsing resume sending DTMF tones Pause for one second A D Fourth column DTMF keys Go off hook wait for dial tone or other steady tone pager go ahead or confirmation tone for example then do next item in string F Switch hook flash followed immediately by dialing le Greet Wait for a voice or computer tone answer BH Hang up go on hook L Answer Supervision Wait for telephony signal from destination Use only with trunk four wire connections N Start a new activity do not go off hook OQ Ring once P Go off hook do not wait for dial tone is Switch hook flash no wait required u Go off hook wait for dial tone v Voice pager play first unplayed message and update mailbox to count it as played When designing your dial strings observe the following rules in assigning each of the three components e The first character in the dial string must make the server go off hook and wait for a dial tone A T is recommended e An F switch hook flash produces the switch hook flash followed immediately by dialing e The access code is always outdialed before the pager number The dial string used is dependent on the pager system selected e The pager system part of the dial string is limited to 30 characters e Only 16 pager systems can be stored in the NuPoint Voice configura
267. r to 30 messages If you assign LCOS 2 to mailboxes 5000 through 5899 all these mailboxes have the same limits each callers message is limited to two minutes with a maximum of 30 messages in each mailbox You can create other LCOSs and assign them to other mailboxes Procedures You can perform these procedures located in Volume 2 of this manual with an LCOS Procedure Number Assign an LCOS to a Mailbox CP 4351 Create a New LCOS from a Copy CP 5054 Create a New LCOS or Modify Existing LCOS Limits CP 5017 View LCOS Information CP 6048 Default LCOS LCOS 1 is preconfigured it contains the default values for all parameters All mailboxes are assigned LCOS 1 by default unless otherwise configured by the system administrator Although you can modify LCOS 1 it is recommended that you leave it as is Tables 8 1 through 8 7 provide a quick reference to all the limits parameters with default values Table 8 1 Limits Parameters Menu Greeting length 2 0 minutes User name length 2 seconds Message count 73 Messages per billing 0 no limit User message length 5 0 minutes Caller message length 5 0 minutes Maximum login time 0 no limit Maximum NP View Inactivity Timeout 59 minutes Network queue message count 73 Maximum attachments per message 72 Maximum attachments per network message 72 Message delivery login delay 5 seconds GCHHSORNEPWEZO Ve He He YH DPV VHS YH YH YH WH Table 8 2 Mo
268. r number and the call is answered it then sends the post pager number to be displayed on the pager e The busy pager attempts the number of times that the server attempts to notify the user of an unplayed message when it receives a busy tone on the last page attempt e The busy pager interval the number of minutes the server waits between repages when it receives a busy tone on the last page attempt Pager Application Worksheets Use the combined information from three worksheets to organize data for configuring a Pager application the NuPoint Voice or DID NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet the Mailbox Individual Worksheet and the Outdial Line Group Worksheet e The NuPoint Voice or DID NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet you completed for the NuPoint Voice or DID NuPoint Voice application contains information applicable to message delivery and call placement e Ifyou are including message delivery in this application you set all parameters in the Other Pager Features Menu to the same settings as the primary application that is configured on your server For example if the NuPoint Voice application is used for processing most calls on your server copy the entries from the NuPoint Voice Worksheet into the Other Pager Features Menu The primary application could be NuPoint Voice or one of the integrations such as SL 1 IVMS NEC 2400 Intecom ITT or Centrex e Ifyou are including call placement in this application establish a
269. r Logfile e Statistics reports e Verify reports e Billing reports e Configuration and usage reports e Phonebook Report Five of the reports in this chapter are also included in the nstallation and Service Manual along with their related procedures The duplicated reports and procedures are e Hard Disk Operational Parameters Report e History File System Error Logfile e System Information Report e Virtual Drive Statistics Report Overview The server records information for many uses such as determining the status of the server troubleshooting a problem maintaining a history of software installed on the server checking mailbox activity or administering mailboxes Reports can be directed to the console to a serial port or a file You can generate a hard copy of a report by connecting a printer to a serial port The server supports a 9600 baud 400 cps 75K buffer serial printer Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 155 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Output Options If the report is long use the P option when displaying the report to the console This displays the report 24 lines at a time pausing until you hit the space bar You must enter Q to Quit out of the pausing option You can enter Q at any time if you do not want to see the entire report If the P option is not available for a particular report use the following commands to control scrolling e To stop scrolling Ctr
270. r a month User messages are incremented in two ways e When a caller phones his her own mailbox and makes a message for another mailbox the recipient s mailbox counter increases When a user gives a message with comments to another mailbox the counter of the recipient mailbox increases by one The message plus the comments are counted as one message Caller messages are incremented in several ways When a caller phones into the server directly and leaves a message e When a greeting is delivered for a Greeting Only mailbox This includes times when the mailbox owner logs into his mailbox by pressing the star key while the greeting is playing e When a caller phones into the server directly and leaves an urgent message e When a caller phones into the server directly leaves a message and requests a receipt response Network Rates Network rates that can be set are grouped as message counts and message lengths Network message counts include messages sent messages sent urgent messages received and messages received urgent Network message lengths include messages sent messages sent urgent messages received and messages received urgent See Table 11 2 for a complete list of network rate statistics Pager Calls Pager call rates are set by pager system not by individual pager Pagers that have the same access code index are on the same pager system In the Billing Report charges for pager call
271. r direct inward dial telephone lines The hardware setup is very different and additional configuration steps are needed Pager Application This application is used for a number of features that place telephone calls out of the server Paging can call a radio pager to let the user know there is a message waiting The user must call into the server to receive the message Message delivery calls a telephone and allows the user to log in and receive a message Call placement calls a telephone number to deliver a message Some optional features such as NuPoint Fax and Cut through Paging also use this application to place outdials Message Waiting Applications These applications allow a message waiting indicator at users phones to signal that a new message has arrived Typically these indicators are lights but this depends on the telephone equipment and switch installed The software supports 24 kinds of message waiting indicators Optional Features Optional features are not discussed in this manual If you purchase them you will receive the documentation to place in your Optional Features Manual However they are configured with many of the same modifiers discussed in this manual Optional features often purchased are listed below e AMIS Analog Network e NP WakeUp e NuPoint Agent e Call Detail Recorder e NPCSO e Cut Through Paging Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentat
272. r message delivery calls In addition you need to set phone line exception 11 to 1 and line exception 170 to 1700 To add message delivery to Anita s mailbox specify the following on an Outdial Line Group Worksheet Pager system index 1 Access code TOT On the message delivery Mailbox Individual Worksheet entries are Pager system Pager access code index 1 defined as T9T Pager number 5556836 Post Pager number Pager frequency 3 or press Enter Pager interval 10 Pager access type U unbilled Message delivery Yes To add additional pagers or message delivery numbers to Anita s mailbox the server prompts for additional pagers If you answer Yes the server prompts you for the next pager s information Note Selecting message delivery in the mailbox automatically tells the server to wait for a greeting Do not include a V or G in the dial string Call Placement Example Call placement only has to be configured once The following example shows how you might use call placement Call placement is an efficient way to contact large numbers of people in an emergency For example a pharmacy chain can quickly notify its branches of a product recall Caller Action NuPoint Voice Code Wait for dial tone T Tell the PBX that you want an outside line 9 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 60 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Wait for a dial tone to confirm that you have the outside
273. r the number of the AC controller The controller number is either 1 or 2 depending on the controller unit that is shipped with the AC message lamp system Both controllers are equivalent the unit shipped depends on availability The controller number is displayed in the server s configuration report Tip and Ring Message Waiting Lamps The server sends signals over the telephone lines to either a Tip and Ring Message Waiting Notification Controller TRNC which controls message waiting indicators at users stations or to a dispatch indicator board which is used for automated dispatch applications When this message waiting type is chosen during mailbox create or modify the server issues a prompt that lets you specify the chassis number and line number More than one TRNC unit can be connected to a server The chassis number is the number of the TRNC unit to which the user s telephone line is connected The line number is the exact position where the line is attached to that chassis The technician who installs the Tip amp Ring message waiting indicators system makes a list of the users stations and their corresponding addresses You can also use this message waiting type with the Alltel Dispatch System Video Dispatch Video Dispatch is part of the Automated Dispatch Communications System Video terminals display the status of dispatch mailboxes These displays are updated as messages are received played and deleted Special hardwar
274. r waits between pages The default is 30 wait half an hour between pages Busy pager attempts This is the number of times 0 255 the server retries the page until it completes the specified number of pages or completes a successful page Set the number of attempts to a high number if the server will be encountering busy pager systems The default is 0 unlimited retries Busy pager interval This is the length of time 0 255 minutes the server waits between pages when a busy signal has been received Set the Busy Pager Interval lower than the Pager Interval setting The idea is that if a busy signal has been received the page should be retried sooner than if speech or silence was received The default is 0 retry every minute Message delivery This activates the message delivery option of paging When enabled set to Y a new message causes the server to call the telephone number defined for message delivery and ask whomever answers to log into the user s mailbox Then the user can hear the message and perform other NuPoint Voice operations If message delivery is enabled paging is not available for that message waiting type However you can set one message waiting type can for paging and another for message delivery Or on the same message waiting type you can set the primary for paging and the alternate for message delivery The default is N no message delivery Suppress pages This parameter turns off the paging f
275. raphs An RCOS Worksheet Figure 8 8 helps you organize the information you need for assigning RCOS parameters Enter these parameters in the RCOS Specific Parameters portion of the worksheet Home NPA Because a system can connect to foreign exchange trunks you must specify the local NPA for each RCOS If a dial string does not contain an NPA this number is added for the screening process The system can accept a number of up to three digits for the NPA Digits to Be Absorbed Many calls contain numbers at the beginning of the dial string that allow access to outside lines international calling or pager systems You must remove these numbers before the actual screening process can begin Numbers entered in the Absorption Table are removed from the dial string before the screening process If the dial string does not contain any digits to be absorbed there is an option to skip the balance of the call screening process This facilitates outdial placement to other mailboxes on the system The system absorbs the longest matching string in the absorption table from the dial string starting from the first digit The table capacity is 16 patterns with a maximum of 10 digits per pattern Exact Match Database You can enter numbers in the exact match database and specify if they are to be allowed or disallowed The table capacity is 100 patterns with a maximum of 25 digits per pattern Entries to this database should include common nu
276. re Limits Parameters Menu A NP WakeUp phone length 7 digits B Paging phone length 7 digits C Message delivery phone length 7 digits D Future delivery message count 99 E Max days future delivery 60 days F Max family member or guest 0 not used G Message waiting indicator message length 0 no minimum H Minimum message length 0 no minimum I Maximum pages per billing 0 no limit J Maximum wakeups per billing 0 no limit K Maximum outstanding wakeup calls 0 not used L Callback number length 7 digits Table 8 3 Even More Limits Parameters Menu Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 108 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 A Max days NP WakeUp 0 no limit Max days reminder call 0 not used Max reminder calls per billing 0 not used Max destinations per reminder call 0 not used Max members per distribution list 200 Max recipients count 200 per message Max number of distribution lists 99 lists Min number of recipients for receipt summary 0 no recipients I Minimum billed number length 0 digits J Max hours to wait for reply from NIB 0 not used TQHmHOQW Table 8 4 Call Placement Menu RNA retry limit 10 retries RNA retry interval 60 minutes Busy retry limit 10 retries Busy retry interval 10 minutes Message phone length 7 digits
277. re applied to the usage as accumulated a rate of 001 would be a significant charge and the only way the rate could be changed would be to double it Therefore when charges are calculated disk usage values are copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 151 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 divided by one hundred and the rate is specified to the nearest mil per minute of speech that has been kept for ten hours Other factors in the calculation of charges are A user is not billed for messages that have not been deleted at the time that billing data are gathered These messages are eventually deleted however and the charges are greater since the time on disk has increased e No disk usage is accumulated for names or greetings Charges for these can be included in the base rates e Ifa message is made with a distribution list each mailbox that receives the message is charged for it e Ifa user gives a message with comments to another user the sender is charged for the original message for as long as it remains on the server The recipient is charged disk usage for both the original message and for the comments until each is deleted from the mailbox Messages Received Every time a message is left in a mailbox one of 14 statistics is incremented for that mailbox Each message statistic can accumulate up to 4095 messages before it resets to zero This is equivalent to 132 messages per day fo
278. reports available at the server console can give a clear picture of breaches in server security or potential security or abuse concerns For more details on any of these reports see the Reports chapter Mailbox Reports Mailboxes with no activity are listed in the Idle Mailboxes Report found under Mailbox Statistics in the Reports Menu The list in this report contains any unassigned or municipalized mailboxes in the server If a mailbox that you think should appear is not listed it can be a sign that someone is illegitimately using the mailbox You should run a Mailbox Dump Report for the specific mailbox to obtain more information about activity in that mailbox The Mailbox Dump Report allows you to obtain a comprehensive report on a specific mailbox including login status and usage statistics Use this report to see detailed information on any mailbox that you suspect of questionable activity The Mailbox Totals Report gives the same type of information as the Idle Mailboxes Report except that it is for all mailboxes in the server The Mailboxes With Activity entry in this report shows the number of mailboxes that have either been logged into or have received a message The Mailbox Data Inquiry Report Inquire About Mailboxes in the Mailbox Maintenance Menu provides summary statistics for a single mailbox or a range of mailboxes You can scan the columns in this report to look for either no message storage appropriate for uninitializ
279. rity of other mailbox owners e tis useful at sites where some employees do classified work that should not be discussed with other employees You can assign up to 32 000 GCOSs Procedures You can perform the following procedures with GCOS These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number GCOS Usage CP 3345 Add or Delete a Bitmapped GCOS Group CP 5030 Assign a GCOS to a Mailbox CP 4346 Define a Bitmapped GCOS CP 4347 Use an Empty GCOS For One way Communication CP 3348 View GCOS Information CP 6049 How a GCOS Works There are two types of GCOSs bitmapped and affinity group Bitmapped GCOSs are GCOSs 1 through 64 Affinity group GCOSs are GCOSs 65 through 32 000 The two types work very differently though you can mix both types in one system Bitmapped GCOSs A bitmapped GCOS is a collection of groups A group is nothing more than a number from 1 through 128 Two users can exchange messages if their bitmapped GCOSs have any of the same groups To allow all users to communicate with each other use the default GCOS 1 It contains all 128 groups Figure 8 2 shows three possible ways to set up the same bitmapped GCOS As the illustration shows a bitmapped GCOS can have many a few or no groups defined Figure 8 2 Versatility of a Bitmapped GCOS Configuration copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 122 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 You can enable message exchange ra
280. rksheets are located in Volume 2 of this manual FCOS The FCOS assigned to a child mailbox determines its relationship to the rotational mailbox and also determines how it is used For example FCOS 17 or a customized equivalent enables a rotational mailbox FCOS 6 or a customized equivalent enables the mailbox to give the caller information then hang up Use either one of the defaults described in the Feature Class of Service chapter or a customized FCOS that includes all the applicable feature bits Index If you want rotation to start at the first child mailbox in the rotational mailbox s distribution list 01 just enter a check mark otherwise enter the index number of the mailbox you want the rotation to start at Rotation starts with the lowest numbered index Period If you want the rotation to cycle on a time and date basis enter the number of hours in the period This is the length of time before the server rotates to the next child mailbox All callers reach the same mailbox in the distribution list during the stated period No index is necessary Start date For the period type of rotation enter the date on which the rotation cycle is to start Start time For the period type of rotation enter the time at which the rotation cycle is to start Figure 6 10 Sample Rotational Mailbox Diagram List A rotational mailbox must have distribution list 01 whose members are the mailboxes that are rotated to If the list is sorted when it
281. rough an attendant or switchboard Digit absorption Used by the DID NuPoint Voice application this process ignores leading DN digits not needed for a user s extension or mailbox number Digit offset Used by the DID NuPoint Voice application this process adds digits to or subtracts digits from the DN to correspond a user s extension or mailbox number Digital networking Networking method that transmits voice messages to remote servers as digital files See NP Net Distribution list A group of mailboxes to which the NuPoint Voice application sends the same message Distribution lists allows a user to send the same message to a number of recipients at the same time Users and the Administrator can assign mailbox numbers to distribution lists DN Directory number a telephone number DTMF tone Dual Tone Multi Frequency the sounds created by pressing the keys on a pushbutton telephone E amp M signaling Ear and mouth signaling a pair of wires carrying signals between trunk equipment and separate signaling equipment The E lead receives the M lead transmits Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 201 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 ESMDI Enhanced Simplified Message Desk Interface a standard call data packet format used in Centrex applications with additional features not found in SMDI used in unified integrations ESS Electronic Switching System switching equipment used in Bell Syst
282. s Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 152 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 are listed by line group Each time a successful page is issued a counter is incremented in the mailbox This does not necessarily correspond to the number of messages received If two messages are received at the same time only one page is made If a message is not picked up within a selected period the pager interval which was configured when the mailbox was created the server repages if the mailbox pager frequency which also was configured when the mailbox was created is greater than 1 Each repage is counted as a separate page Unsuccessful repages are not counted in the mailbox statistics Adjusting Pager Call Rates in Mid Cycle The rate at which a page is billed depends on the access code index the Pager System number that is in the mailbox setup at the time the gather is done not the one that is present at the time the page is made If the access code index or the billing rate is changed in the middle of the billing period all pages that were accumulated during the billing period are billed at the new rate Termination of Paging When paging service is discontinued in the middle of the billing period there is no access code index in the mailbox at the time of billing and therefore no pages are billed even if some have accumulated To avoid this situation generate a Termination Report described earlier bef
283. s allows these mailboxes to also perform other special functions such as broadcast messages which use distribution list 1 The mailbox owner can define the remaining distribution lists For more information on special mailboxes see the Special Mailbox section later in this chapter Nesting Distribution Lists Nesting refers to the ability to make one distribution list a member of another list This allows you to create a distribution list for each department and then create a company wide distribution list that only contains the department lists Any changes to the department lists are automatically picked up by the company wide list The server allows unlimited distribution list nesting by default except in a broadcast mailbox Nesting operates as shown in Figure 6 6 Figure 6 6 Distribution List Nesting Once the lists in Figure 6 6 are set up mailbox 301 can make a message to list 2 and the copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 88 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 following mailboxes receive the message 224 through 227 101 through 104 and 401 through 403 Mailbox 104 only receives one copy of the message even though it appears in both lists 3 and 4 Feature bit 222 prevents mailbox owners from nesting distribution lists If you are creating the distribution list from the server console identify a nested distribution list by including D before the list number for example D0
284. s before a system shutdown To enable this one way communication an originating mailbox must have an FCOS that allows the originating mailbox to make messages and allows the mailbox owner to make or give messages to a mailbox with an empty GCOS a GCOS you defined without including any groups in it The FCOS feature bits to accomplish this are 020 Make messages e 126 Make give to mailbox with empty GCOS The receiving mailbox must have an FCOS that allows it to receive messages from other users FCOS bit 040 These features enable a user to make a message as well as give messages from other users to the mailbox with the empty GCOS For example suppose the local phone company notifies an answering service that maintenance on buried phone cables will disrupt service for two hours next week If all customers have mailboxes with the FCOS and empty GCOS just described and if the system administrator s mailbox has the same FCOS the system administrator can notify users in advance of the system shut down Interaction Between a GCOS and FCOS Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 124 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Interaction between mailboxes is limited by the GCOS and FCOS that are assigned to them If for example an FCOS allows a user to make confidential messages feature bit 023 other users within the same GCOS must be able to receive messages from other users feature bit 040 and to
285. s set to Yes The Busy Pager Attempts parameter and Busy Pager Interval parameter are not listed The server uses only the Pager Frequency copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 39 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 parameter and Pager Interval parameter in the message delivery process Call placement configuration occurs in the same two areas for each mailbox the NuPoint Voice application configuration data and the mailbox configuration file Message waiting indicators are not used with call placement NuPoint Voice Configuration Data Paging message delivery and call placement require this information in the NuPoint Voice configuration data e The line group used for outdials e Pager system names These are unique names also called pager names to help you identify which pager system you are referring to An example of a pager system name is Outside Access e Hold time This is the number of seconds that the outdial port remains off hook after all outdialing is performed It should be long enough to allow a reorder or busy tone to be returned which alerts the server that a page has failed The default value is 20 seconds The maximum hold time allowed is 90 seconds Set a value of 3 seconds to clear the port more quickly e Pager systems These are outdial indexes that outdial a certain dial string when accessed Each pager system is represented by a number You later enter this number
286. s to type a number from 1 through 24 then press the Enter key bold Words or characters in bold type indicate either a value to be entered by you exactly as shown or when used to indicate a variable entry describe the type of value to be supplied by you Note Unless otherwise stated press Enter after each response you enter User Advisories Reader advisories are given in this manual as shown below Note Information especially useful in relation to this procedure CAUTI ON Information that helps you prevent equipment or software damage CAUTI ON Information that helps you avoid electrostatic discharge ESD damage to the equipment WARNI NG Information that helps you prevent an interruption to telecommunications traffic WARNI NG A hazard that can cause you personal injury OO Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 DANGER Warns of a condition that could severely injure or kill you Before You Start This manual assumes that you are familiar with using a console and keyboard This section describes how to use the NuPoint Messenger server effectively Console Tips and Techniques The tips and techniques offered in the following paragraphs can make configuration entry sessions at the NuPoint Messenger server console more productive Viewing Menus e When you finish entering a value for a parameter the server displays an
287. sage when the choice is made the next message if any is played without any input from the guest Prompts for a guest mailbox are in the form Press P the 7 key to play your message in order to be most helpful to the uninitiated user Callers also hear these expanded prompts Press R the 7 key to review your message As a variation a hotel or motel may wish to assign the full feature guest mailbox This is a mailbox with FCOS 2 Full Guest or its equivalent in the mailbox configuration The desk clerk would still check in this mailbox however the guest would be able to change the name and passcode and would also be able to record a personal greeting make messages for other guest s mailboxes and so on NP OnDemand Template Mailboxes NP OnDemand is an optional feature where the AIP system creates mailboxes only when they are needed A NP OnDemand template mailbox is used as a model for the temporary mailboxes that this application creates Typically temporary mailboxes have their LCOS limits set to very small numbers such as a day or two Rotational Mailbox A rotational mailbox allows callers to hear greetings that change Greetings change either by time and date in a period rotational mailbox or with every call in an index type rotational mailbox A rotational mailbox of either the period type or the index type plays its greeting then plays the greeting of a child mailbox Distribution list
288. sage Delivery in a Mailbox On or Off CP 5014 Paging Display Pager Configuration CP 3330 Tone Pager Configuration CP 3343 Voice Pager Configuration CP 3335 Allow Mailbox Owners to Control Paging CP 3332 Allow Receipt of Urgent Pages or Urgent Message Delivery Only CP 3344 Assign an Alternate Pager to a Mailbox CP 3334 Configure a Mailbox for Paging CP 5019 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 37 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Define a Pager System CP 5012 Set Limits for Paging CP 3336 Set Paging or Message Delivery Schedules and Intervals CP 3321 Test a Pager CP 3358 Turn All Pagers or Message Delivery in a Mailbox On or Off CP 5014 View Pager Configuration CP 6001 Paging The NuPoint Messenger server supports three pager types tone pagers that beep when they are activated display pagers that show the paging party s telephone number and voice pagers that play a few seconds of a message that was left Servers can access any of these types of pagers and can activate the display of a display pager or issue a message for a voice pager when the message is left in a mailbox Figure 4 1 shows one way paging works in the server When a message is left in a mailbox configured for paging the server places a call to the paging company through the PBX and the CO The pager then indicates the call BBL paging and the TNPP integration are optional features that supply a direct RS 232 link to the pagin
289. sages that were received the number of messages that were still available and the percent of message storage available during a specified reporting period The reporting period can be any hour or range of hours from the current day or portions of the most recent seven days The server administrator can choose to run either a full report which gives the statistics in 15 minute increments for each hour of the reporting period or a summary report which shows the average message usage for each hour Figure 12 8 shows a Sample Standard Message Usage Report Figure 12 8 Sample Standard Message Usage Report MESSAGE USAGE 15min REPORT Fri Apr 21 1995 10 42 am 04 17 95 8hr llhr minutes interval Max Messages 90000 MESSAGE HOUR 07 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE MESSAGE FREE 86534 86533 86534 86533 86533 PERCENT USED 4 4 4 4 4 MESSAGE HOUR 08 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE MESSAGE FREE 86518 86501 86484 86508 86502 PERCENT USED 4 4 4 4 4 MESSAGE HOUR 08 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE MESSAGE FREE 86484 86508 86484 86508 86496 PERCENT USED 4 4 4 4 4 MESSAGE HOUR 09 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE MESSAGE FREE 86512 86515 86558 86568 86538 PERCENT USED 4 4 4 4 4 MESSAGE HOUR 09 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE MESSAGE FREE 86558 86568 86558 86568 86563 PERCENT USED 4 4 4 4 4 MESSAGE HOUR 10 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 AVERAGE MESSAGE FREE 86611 86636 86641 86621 86627 PERCENT USED 4 4 4 4 4 ME
290. se 7 0 5 3 Mailboxes starting with 5 6 7 and 8 are three digits long 6 3 7 3 B B 1 9 10 Mailbox numbers starting with 9 are ten digits long Valid mailbox numbers are 916 456 7777 and 912 456 7777 H 0 No mailboxes start with 1 Mailbox numbers 1 11 111 and so Jon are all invalid The default dialing plan is 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 meaning all mailboxes have 3 digits Other entries allowed in the dialing plan allow other NuPoint Messenger server features Table 2 5 lists these entries for your reference Table 2 5 Dialing Plan Elements Element l Explanation 0 11 Length of the mailbox Zero means none may start with this number v Variable number 1 through 11 of digits server uses timeout to determine end of mailbox number M Analog networking AMIS mailboxes leading digit iA Dial by Name ASCII leading digit T Call placement leading digit An Networked mailboxes n mailbox number length NV variable number length acceptable Pn Network mailbox prefix used n mailbox length including prefix digit If the extension numbers at your site use too many starting digits to implement all these capabilities in your dialing plan you could use the optional star prefix dialing plan described below Optional Star Prefix Dialing Plan The dialing plan described above tells the NuPoint Voice application how to handle DTMF digits 1 through 9 If you have mailbox numbers an
291. server see System Statistics in the nsta lation and Service Manual All three of these reports are available through the Statistics option of the Reports Menu The Total Speech and Account Breakdown Report see sample in Figure 12 30 summarizes account mailbox statistics and speech statistics for all mailboxes in the server Speech storage is used for messages copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 190 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 names and greetings Figure 12 31 Sample Total Speech and Account Breakdown Report ACCOUNT STATISTICS Mailboxes 35 Dist Lists 4 Copy Lists 1 Config Records 347 Statistics Records 168 Total 555 Total Free Used Message Numbers 132000 119610 9 Speech Blocks 384000 107693 53 SPEECH STATISTICS Amount Frames Blocks Blocks greetl 794 135499 4618 1 greet2 TL3 22665 766 0 5 greet3 84 15227 516 0 greet4 67 12475 420 0 names 606 20142 866 0 dinames 577 22789 978 0 fax greet 616 604438 19186 4 fax msg 880 1300502 41070 10 messages 10149 8580576 268143 69 blocks used by greets and names 7186 blocks used by fax messages greets 60256 average time in seconds for messages 59 Idle Mailboxes Report The Idle Mailboxes Reporty see sample in Figure 12 32 shows the numbers of all mailboxes that have not been logged into by their owners summarizes mailbox usage statistics and lists FCOSs LCOSs and department codes assigned to idle mail
292. sets to default Default 99 Max Days Future Delivery Sets the maximum delay in days to deliver a message in the future Enter Number of days from 0 through 365 0 means no future delivery Default 60 days Max Family Member or Guest Not used Message Waiting Indicator Message Length Sets the shortest time for a message that will activate message waiting or paging for the mailbox Enter Number of seconds from 1 to 5 0 for no limit Default 0 no minimum time Minimum Message Length Sets the shortest time for a message to be considered valid Shorter messages are not delivered Enter Number of seconds from 1 through 5 or 0 for no minimum Default 0 No minimum time Tips amp Techniques When testing the configuration set this to 1 or 2 to accommodate quick test messages Maximum Pages per Billing Sets the maximum number of times a user can be paged during one billing cycle Enter Number from 0 through 999 0 means no limit Default 0 Maximum Wakeups per Billing Sets the maximum number of wakeup calls a user can schedule during one billing cycle See also the NP WakeUp Guide Enter Number from 0 through 999 0 means no limit Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 114 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Default 0 Maximum Outstanding Wakeup Calls Not used Callback Number Length Sets the maximum number of digits a user can enter to for a callback
293. sign pager systems that outdial call placement or message delivery calls to a larger line group Configuring a Dial String Use the information in the following paragraphs for entries on the Mailbox Worksheet and Outdial Line Group Worksheet When you are configuring the server to outdial you want it to duplicate the steps that you would perform to dial a pager or place a phone call Paging Many telephone switches require that you dial an access code to get an outside line To call the pager you usually dial the pager company telephone number listen for a pager tone then dial the code number of the pager Before you dial the pager company telephone number however you pick up the receiver on the telephone and listen for a dial tone to be sure that the telephone system is ready to accept the number that you dial The steps for successfully activating this pager therefore are to 1 go off hook and listen for the dial tone 2 dial any access code necessary to get an outside line 3 dial the pager company telephone number 4 listen for the pager tone then 5 dial the pager number All these steps must be configured Message Delivery and Call Placement Many telephone switches require that you dial an access code to get an outside line Anything you must do such as waiting for tones other than dialing the actual number must be configured Translate Operations to a Dial String The server recognizes certain characters which al
294. sion e The server allows three to five seconds of response time for each prompt before it announces no change and returns to the Administration Menu e During administration any activity causes a one minute timer to start If one minute elapses without input the server automatically disconnects you and you must repeat the entire access procedure e If you feel that you are running out of time press 1 in response to any prompt to restart the timer The server issues an error message and repeats the prompt Passcode Protecting the Administrator s Mailbox You can set or change the administrator s mailbox passcode by phone see Administration by Phone on the Task List for the procedure Volume 2 of this manual or from the console For more information on passcode protecting the Administrator s mailbox see the Server Security chapter Note When your server was configured the technician entered a passcode length which controls the number of digits that can be entered from the telephone From the server console you can ensure greater server security by giving the administrator s mailbox a telephone passcode that has more digits than the other mailboxes on the server To do this use the Set Passcode Tutorial option from the Mailbox Maintenance Menu See the Mailboxes chapter for more information Note You cannot log into the Administrator s mailbox unless a non trivial passcode is set Recording a Name for the A
295. ssage for Cindy Jones press 1 To leave a message for Laura Smith press 2 If a user does not record a name the prompt would be To leave a message for mailbox 203 press 3 A user of a shared extension mailbox would be prompted to enter the same digits when logging in for example Hello Ivy Dormitory room 18 To retrieve messages for Cindy Jones press 1 to retrieve messages for Laura Smith press 2 Then the user would be prompted with a name confirmation and asked for the child mailbox s passcode If a user moves to another room or telephone station you can transfer the child mailbox to another shared mailbox extension without losing any messages To do this you would remove the child mailbox from distribution list 01 and add it to another shared mailbox extension s distribution list Then you would change the child mailbox s distribution list to point to the new parent mailbox All settings for the child mailbox such as messages greetings name etc will remain intact NP Receptionist Considerations Feature bit 121 Define tree mailbox lets a child mailbox also be a tree mailbox Feature bit 141 Define chain mailbox in NP Receptionist allows a child mailbox to act as a chain mailbox In addition with these feature bits included in the mailbox s FCOS NP Receptionist can route a call from a chain mailbox to a tree mailbox and vice versa Callers can bypass the single digit tree options if they want to enter
296. st 6 6 TOTAL NEW SINCE LAST GATHER 518 Mailbox Totals Report This report gives the same type of information as the Idle Mailboxes Report but for all mailboxes in the server The Mailboxes With Activity entry in this report shows the number of mailboxes that have either been logged into or received a message Phoneline Exceptions The Reports Menu gives you an option to obtain a Sample System Phone Line Exceptions Report that shows any phoneline exceptions set for lines in each module host You can obtain a report for all 128 lines or any specific lines desired Figure 12 33 shows a System Phoneline Exceptions Report on lines 1 through 4 Figure 12 33 Sample System Phoneline Exceptions Report Keep entering triplets then enter lt CR gt on a line by itself copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 192 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 line triplets to report line triplets to report Line 1 3 0 configuration all parameters set to defaults Line 1 3 1 configuration all parameters set to defaults Line 1 3 1 configuration all parameters set to defaults Line 1 4 0 configuration 4 Pause compression enable no Line 1 4 1 configuration 4 Pause compression enable no Line 2 1 0 configuration 13 Enable AGC yes 4 Pause compression enable no Line 2 1 1 configuration 13 Enable AGC yes 4 Pause compression enable no Keep entering triplets then enter lt CR gt on a line
297. st Login PW Bad Real Name root 0 Nov 14 17 26 Y bob 101 lt none gt Robert A Robertson spencer 100 Oct 20 14 59 Y 1 Spencer F Hire Figure 12 38 Sample List of Authorized Users with FPSA User ID UID Last Login PW Exp Perm Bad Lock Lock Time Real NamG lt s4S4s6 SSeS See Rae SSae SSS SSeS Ses See Sse root 0 Nov 14 17 26 Nov 15 bob 101 lt none gt Nov 15 56 Robert A Robertson mary 102 lt none gt Nov 15 234 Mary Contrary spencer 100 Oct 20 14 59 Nov 15 2345 1 Spencer F Hire History File The History File is a record of modifications made to the server Entries are made to this record by the server administrator a distributor or technical personnel You must review this record before updating software on the server to verify that no custom changes have been made that are over written with the new software You can view the current History File and add entries to it update it at a server maintenance console Operational Parameters for a Hard Disk To get information about the size and model of the hard disk installed in a module you can display or print a report of operational parameters for the hard disk This report also shows error recovery parameters disconnect and reconnect parameters format parameters and other drive parameters such as the number of cylinders Figure 12 39 shows a Sample Report of Hard Disk Operational Parameters Figure 12 39 Sample R
298. sts for information If the request results in a sale the account executive who answered the request receives credit for that sale Broadcasting the message waiting status of a mailbox gives this firm an easy and efficient way to pass these potential sales on to its brokers The brokerage first routes all prospects to a main mailbox in which they can leave requests When callers leave requests the server automatically turns on the message waiting lights on brokers phones The first available broker then logs into the main mailbox and responds to the request Configuration Requirements The broadcast message waiting status capability uses a server feature plus distribution list 01 of a mailbox e You must include feature bit 134 Broadcast message waiting only in the FCOS assigned to a mailbox before it can send its message waiting status to a distribution list e You must also set up distribution list 01 of a mailbox to include all the destination mailboxes to which to send the message waiting status of the main mailbox Multiple Mailboxes per User Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 96 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Each mailbox in distribution list 01 always reflects the message waiting status of the main mailbox regardless of how many messages are in that destination mailbox Therefore you may want to assign a separate mailbox to users for their messages and reserve the destination mailbo
299. t e Abort the report by pressing any key while the server is reading the statistics Extend the report by pressing C when prompted by the server after the statistics for the first 30 mailboxes are listed The server responds by reporting statistics for the next 30 mailboxes copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 134 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Inquiring About Mailboxes Neither the Inquire nor the Search function is available by phone however you can get some information by using the following techniques e Usage statistics are available by pressing U from the Administration Menu entering the desired mailbox number in response to the prompt Enter mailbox to begin summary at and then pressing any key to stop the report after the desired statistics have been given e Class of service limits class of service message waiting type and AC message lamp address if applicable are given when you select Modify from the Administration Menu Press the star key in response to each prompt to leave the current values unchanged 10 Server Security This chapter covers e Protecting your server from outside abuse e Protecting your server from abuse by mailbox owners and users e Protecting the server maintenance and administration functions e Security reports and audit trails e FPSA Overview Server security refers to protecting your NuPoint Messenger server from abuse both fr
300. t Voice Application Default Administrator s mailbox number 998 Allow dial an extension for callers N Allow dial an extension for users N Allow multiple messages for outside caller Y Answer delay o Attendant s mailbox number 999 Attendant transfer string S l Dial by name last name first w Exact match break Y General greeting mailbox number None Group name None Key 0 for attendant transfer N Line group number 1 Line s in group All on server Mailbox dialing plan B 0 0305 0 0 0 000 l Number of names threshold B names Passcode length 4 digits min 10 digits max Passcode trip count b l Passcode trip period 24 hours Pre company name dial string None Pre mailbox greeting dial string None l Prompts language English Single digit access None Speech quality for messages 18 Speech quality for names and greetings 18 Suppress mailbox number None l System attendant s extension 0 Wait prompt Y Weekend days table DDDDDNN Work day J8 a m 5 p m NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet Use the NuPoint Voice Application Worksheet Figure 2 2 to organize the data The rest of this chapter explains concepts you need to know for completing the worksheet and using it to configure the NuPoint Voice application The following paragraphs explain sections of the worksheet Pre programmed default values are given where applicable If you want to use a default value indicate that fact on the worksheet Then you do not h
301. t are calculated go into four types of billing reports that the server can generate Each report gives a breakdown of charges for individual mailboxes by statistics then calculates the total amount that is due Each report has a different purpose Table 11 1 summarizes the report types and their purposes Samples of these reports and explanations of their contents are contained in the Reports chapter Table 11 1 Types of Billing Reports Type of Report Purpose Billing Report Shows current charges for each mailbox individually by statistics shows total current charges Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 149 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Mailbox Blocked Report Same information as in the Billing Report but with no Blocked Billing Report titles or summaries input to other databases l Previous Billing Report Same information as in the Billing Report but uses data from previous billing period determines proper billing if a gather fails Termination Report Final billing when a mailbox is checked out and deleted Jor when paging service is discontinued Configuration Requirements for Billing Configuring for billing involves obtaining a report of current rates using a Billing Worksheet and adjusting rates if necessary Current Billing Rates You can see what the current rates are for various statistics such as base rates and pager calls through the Report Rates option
302. t is a number the server adds to or subtracts from the hour portion of a message s time stamp This allows mailbox owners to convert the time stamp on a message to the time zone of their choice The server converts the time in a mailbox so only the mailbox owner hears the converted time stamp for a message Users sending messages to or receiving messages from such a mailbox hear the server s normal time stamp This ability is useful for mailbox owners who live and work in a time zone different from the one where their server is located The time zone offset affects all types of messages except call placement Mailbox Configuration Parameters When you create a mailbox from the console the time zone offset is one of the mailbox configuration parameters The Mailbox Data Report displays the time zone offset along with other parameter settings Example of Use Suppose a mailbox owner works in Atlanta but uses an server based in San Jose By default all the mailbox owner s messages would have a time stamp based on San Jose s time zone If someone sends the mailbox owner a message at 2 p m Pacific Standard Time that is the time stamp the mailbox owner hears for this message However if the time zone offset in a mailbox owner s mailbox has a value of 3 the server tells the mailbox owner that same message was sent at 5 p m The sender of the message though hears that the server sent the message at 2 p m Tutorials The st
303. t is not variable length the server interprets it to mean that message addressing is complete This can be confusing to mailbox owners who find that pressing a pound sign at the same time elicits differing prompts To avoid this confusion it is recommended that you make either all mailboxes variable length or none After entering the final mailbox number and pound sign they must do one of the following e Enter an additional pound sign to get the Begin recording prompt e Wait for the Begin recording prompt copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 91 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Integrations Supported You can configure variable length mailboxes with all integrations which are supported except for the Omni S1 series and the MD 110 Server Time and Date Stamp for Messages The time and date stamp is optional information that the server can add to every message to tell the recipient when the message was recorded If a mailbox owner plays the message the same day it arrives only the time is given for example 2 p m If the mailbox owner plays the message on a later day within the same week the day of the week and the time are announced for example Monday 2 p m If the mailbox owner plays a message more than a week after it was received the day of the week date and time are given for example Monday May 11 2 p m Time Zone Offset A mailbox time zone offse
304. t log in by pressing the star key either before or after entering their mailbox numbers The zero key cannot be used to signal a login When the Key_0 for Attendant Transfer During Greeting parameter is disabled Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 21 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 e Mailbox owners can press either the zero or star key before or after entering their mailbox number to log in The zero option is essential when telephones at the installation site do not have a key Automatic access to the attendant on time out that is when the caller waits in response to the Please enter a mailbox number or wait prompt can be provided if necessary by assigning a Greeting Only class of service to the attendant s mailbox The attendant s mailbox can then be used only to make messages of the day Pre Company Name Dial String The NuPoint Voice application outputs this dial string immediately after going off hook and before playing the Company Greeting either the standard Welcome to the message center prompt or the Administrator s mailbox greeting This string is used only if the NP Receptionist Receptionist optional feature has been installed on your server and employees can manually call forward their phones directly to the message center number In this situation an NP Receptionist port may inadvertently be connected to one of the ports that is running the message
305. t mapped One GCOS is assigned to each mailbox These are explained in the Other Classes of Service chapter Network Class of Service A Network Class of Service NCOS controls users network access and is a part of the NP Net Digital Network optional feature More NCOS information is contained in the NuPoint Voice NP Net Optional Feature Manual Restriction Class of Service A Restriction Class of Service RCOS is an element of NPA NXX call screening that restricts mailbox outdials to certain area codes or to certain prefixes within an area code One RCOS is assigned to each mailbox These are explained in the Other Classes of Service chapter Tenant Class of Service A Tenant Class of Service TCOS is used with the ESMDI Multi Tenant application to govern copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 10 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 mailbox interaction between user communities Refer to the NuPoint Voice Enhanced SMDI Integration Manual for more information Billing and Reports You can generate reports from information on the existing applications and whatever modifications you have put into effect Billing is an application that collects call and message information so users can be billed for their server usage Refer to the Billing chapter for information on how to set up billing and different rate structures and to the Reports chapter for more information on different reports available
306. t time 1 30 129 6 caller connect time 2 40 50 disk usageTotal Charges 32 93 Mailbox Blocked Report The Mailbox Blocked Report Blocked Billing Report see sample in Figure 12 24 is in a special format that can be sent to other databases It presents the same information as the Billing Report but in blocked form that is with no titles or summaries Use this report if you want to organize the billing data into your own format such as for an invoice or monthly statement Note f you are counting the fields in the Blocked Billing Report please be aware that the department code field is blank not a zero if there is no department code for a mailbox All other fields are represented by a zero There are 102 possible fields in the Blocked Billing Report Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 180 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Figure 12 24 Sample Mailbox Blocked Report Use the Table 12 2 to identify the field names and field lengths of statistics provided in the Mailbox Blocked Report All fields are right justified all fields other than the mailbox number are blank filled Table 12 2 _ Field Descriptions for a Mailbox Blocked Report Number of Field Name Characters Mailbox number 16 Department code supports up to 2000 codes 10 User messages 5 Caller messages Wakeup messages Login Greets User connect time Caller connect time these four fields can be repeated up to 1
307. tatistic This rate setting arrangement gives you the option to charge fixed rates give volume discounts or charge for heavy use During day to day server operation over 120 different statistics can be kept for each mailbox grouped into these six categories e Mailbox access e Base rates Connect time e Disk usage e Messages received e Network rates e Pager calls You can instruct the server to perform a gather of these statistics then obtain billing reports generated by the server from the resulting information Billing an outdial to a specified account and specifying a long distance carrier for outdials are covered in the Mailboxes chapter Procedures Use the following procedures to configure the billing function These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number Billing Function Usage CP 3365 Adjust Billing Rates for Full Screen Interface CP 4355 Bill Outdials to an Account or Long Distance Carrier CP 3289 Check Current Billing Rates CP 4354 Configure an Automatic Gather CP 4356 Request a Gather CP 4357 Set Base Rates CP 4363 Set Billing Rates for Connect Time CP 4364 Set Billing Rates for Disk Usage CP 4358 Set Billing Rates for Mailbox Accesses CP 4359 Set Billing Rates for Message Delivery CP 5016 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 146 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Set Billing Rates for Messages Received CP 4360 Set Billing Rates for Network
308. tem to a voice processing system Time stamp Voice prompts that inform a user of the time and date each message was recorded Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 209 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Tip amp Ring Telephony term for the ground tip and positive ring wires in an electrical circuit Also known as Tip Ring or T R Transfer Moving a call from one station to another within a telephone network or site Tree mailbox Mailbox that routes users and callers to child mailboxes based on keypad input Tree mailboxes must contain a distribution list so that the server knows how to route users and callers Triplet A set of three numbers separated by colons that refer to a specific line connected to the server Triplets use the form m s p where m refers to the module number 1 4 s the line card slot number 0 15 and p the port number starting from 0 on the line card Trunk A telephone communication channel between two points where one is usually the CO or switching center Tutorial A user option which is a series of detailed prompts that guides the user through simple mailbox operation UCD Uniform Call Distributor a device to handle incoming calls and distribute them among several agents Less intelligent than ACD Unbilled outdial index See Outdial index Unplayed message A message that has not been played heard by the user Urgent message A message that
309. ternal outdial index See Outdial index Keep The ability to store a message for future playing Keypad The set of pushbuttons on a telephone set Keypress Data entry using a telephone keypad LCOS Limits Class of Service a set of options that restricts the capabilities of a mailbox By assigning an LCOS to each mailbox the Administrator determines the controls or limits on a mailbox Limit A single restriction on one of the capabilities of a mailbox Limits may be on such things as time length of messages and number of messages per mailbox You cannot assign an individual limit to a mailbox you must assign an LCOS Line Telephone line input to a NuPoint Voice port Line card Hardware circuit board in a server with ports for each telephone line The line card interfaces between the caller and NuPoint Voice software Line group A set of one or more lines that are configured the same way Line groups are assigned to specific applications such as the NuPoint Voice application or the Pager application Login The process of entering a 1 passcode from the telephone keypad to use various server Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 203 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 functions from within a mailbox or 2 a user ID then a password at a server maintenance console to gain access to menus if FPSA is activated or 3 a user ID and then an optional password at a server maintenance console
310. that use E amp M trunks Users need this delay if the application software sometimes answers an incoming call before all the digits are received causing the switch to stop sending digits In cases where the DID NuPoint Voice application does not work for a customer because the server answers too fast this parameter should solve the problem For more information on this parameter see the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Making a Phoneline Exception for Wink Start The NuPoint Messenger server is compatible with both rotary and DTMF outpulsing from the CO However the telephone company normally requires wink start operation with DID service To enable the NuPoint Messenger server to send wink to the CO on seizure you must change the Wink Start telephony parameter 24 to 1 yes for each DID trunk See DID NuPoint Voice Application in the task list for the procedure Volume 2 of this manual Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 34 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Using the DI D NuPoint Voice Application This section covers the final steps to take in order to use the DID NuPoint Voice application Activating Changes Activating changes for the DID NuPoint Voice application is identical to activating changes as discussed in the NuPoint Voice Application chapter Creating Mailboxes The final step for making DID NuPoint Voice operational is to create mailboxes Refer to Chapter 6 Mail
311. the attendant s extension number if none is present the caller is transferred to the system attendant s extension See the Features Class of Service chapter for more information on FCOSs and feature bits 3 If the called party s mailbox FCOS includes outside caller functions a caller can press 0 after recording a message to send the message and transfer to an attendant If the message is left in the attendant s mailbox the caller is always transferred to the system attendant If the message is left in a personal mailbox the caller is transferred to the system attendant only if no attendant s extension number is present in the mailbox 4 Ifthe attendant s mailbox has been deleted or has a Greeting Only FCOS and the wait prompt is enabled the outside caller who waits is transferred to the system attendant s extension Key_0 for Attendant Transfer During Greeting This function designates the 0 key as either an attendant access number or a log in code The default is N or disabled To enable the Key_0 function you must enter Y If this function is enabled be sure to define a suitable system attendant s extension number and dial string When the Key_0 for Attendant Transfer During Greeting parameter is enabled e The server allows an outside caller to press the zero key while either the company greeting or a mailbox greeting is playing to be transferred to the system attendant s extension e Mailbox owners mus
312. the date and time that the report was run Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 161 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 The first line of the report shows the date and time interval during which the data were gathered GROUP The lines belong to Line Group 1 LINE 1 0 3 HOUR 14 The data displayed immediately below refer to the triplet 1 0 3 during the hour between 2 and 3 p m 00 14 indicates that data in that column were gathered during the first fifteen minutes of the hour 15 29 refers to the second 15 minutes of the hour etc TOTAL The data for the four 15 minute intervals If a hyphen appears in place of a numerical value it means that the data have not yet been gathered For example if the report is run at 3 30 p m and the report interval is for hours 12 15 noon to 3 p m the entries for hour 15 3 to 4 p m show hyphens USAGE The percentage of the hour the line was busy Line 1 0 0 for example was busy for 300 seconds out of 3600 or 8 of the time between 2 and 3 p m SECONDS The total number of seconds in the time period during which the line was busy CALLS The number of calls that were received by that line for the time period Figure 12 5 Sample Line Group Usage Summary Report gt gt gt Acme Products System lt lt lt TOTAL USAGE PER GROUP SUMMARY REPORT Tue Aug 24 1995 2 43 pm Hours 8 17 Days 1 5 GROUP SECONDS CALLS 1 515 24 Reading the Line Gr
313. times for played and unplayed messages by setting the two LCOS parameters Played message retention and Unplayed message retention Besides setting limits on server usage you must ensure that your mailbox listings are current remove mailboxes that are no longer being used Once you have removed a mailbox the server automatically removes it from the Dial by Name database and from all distribution lists Messaging Messaging between mailbox owners is the primary purpose of many voice mail systems but you copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 138 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 must use GCOS and FCOS settings to enforce restrictions on which mailboxes can exchange messages The primary tool for controlling messaging between mailboxes is the GCOS Correct GCOS settings can effectively partition a server so that separate user groups are not aware of one another or so that certain mailboxes can only receive or send messages to other specific mailboxes such as in dispatcher situations GCOS structures also create partitioned Dial by Name A mailbox owner cannot use Dial by Name to address a message to a mailbox that is not accessible due to GCOS restrictions the server does not match or play inaccessible mailbox names You can also use FCOS settings to control the sources and destinations for messages Feature bits 040 through 045 control a mailbox s ability to receive messages from various sources
314. tion at any one time regardless of the number of paging groups configured However each pager system can be shared by many users or line groups Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 e The pager number is limited to 16 characters The server administrator enters it ina mailbox s configuration For example you might configure a pager system of T9T since everyone must dial this to reach an outside number You would then configure the digits of the mailbox owner s telephone number as the pager number when entering a pager message waiting type into the mailbox s configuration As an alternative if many mailbox owners have message delivery to the local prefix 292 you might choose to configure a pager system of T9T292 The choice of where to assign each portion of the dial string is flexible In this example you have three pager systems available which contain the following dial strings Pager System I ndex Access Code Number 0 TOT 2 T9T1408 4 I Same as Dial String in the report of outdial indexes Figure 4 5 If the dial string that you have formulated is T9T14085551313 G1234 you can set up your pager number in three different ways depending on which access code you select Pager System Access Code Pager Number Post Pager Index Number Number lo T9T 14085551313 G 1234 b T9T1408 555
315. tion requests during the time intervals that used a NuPoint Fax resource A transaction starting during one interval and ending in another is counted in the starting interval only However the Total Use and ATB Seconds fields following accumulate for their respective intervals TOTAL USE The number of seconds that fax resources were used during that interval NO RESOURCE COUNT The number of times a transaction could not be completed because no fax resources were available Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 169 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 ATB SECONDS The total number of seconds in the time period that an ATB All Trunks Busy condition occurred to the lines in the fax group ATB COUNT The number of times that an ATB condition occurred to the lines on the fax group The counter is incremented when an ATB condition first occurs The ATB condition must clear then reoccur before the counter is incremented again Figure 12 13 Sample Fax Group ATB Summary Report TOTAL FAX GROUP ATB SUMMARY REPORT Fri Apr 21 1995 9 10 am 04 17 95 8hr 17hr dayl day5 GROUP TRANSACTIONS TOT SEC NO RES ATB CNT ATB SEC BUSY 1 83 4278 0 0 0 0 2 17 513 1 0 0 0 Reading the Fax Group ATB Summary Report The Fax Group Usage Summary Report see sample in Figure 12 13 displays the number of transactions for the interval specified the total seconds of use and the number of time no fax resource was a
316. to gain access to menus if FPSA is not activated Logout The user s process of exiting 1 a mailbox by entering the proper command from the telephone keypad or 2 from the server maintenance console by selecting Exit when in the Main Menu Mailbox The area set apart for each users messages distribution lists and other options Mailbox owner distribution list A distribution list created by a user assigned to that user s mailbox and not accessible to any other server user Mailbox passcode A mailbox security feature that requires a numeric security code to verify a mailbox owner s access to a mailbox can be used whether FPSA is activated or not Contrast with password Main Menu The first and top level set of choices that the NuPoint Voice application offers people who have voice mailboxes in the server and are logged into it for example users Master feature bit A feature bit that must be included in an FCOS in order for related features to work For example if you include feature bit 021 Make and request receipt in an FCOS you must also include the master feature bit 020 Make messages Master distribution list A distribution list created by an Administrator which is assigned to the Administrator s mailbox accessible to many users with the proper FCOS Manu parameter A particular menu choice whose value you can alter through the server console Message Also voice message a voice recording left by users
317. tored on the hard disk in a file named usr vm log logfile and that it is sent to the console when the Show logfile option is selected You can save the record into a file with another name or send the information to either the console or a serial device such copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 156 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 as a printer Using the Logfile Menu there are two ways to change where the logfile is viewed and what port it is sent to The menu choice Toggle Display Choose Logfile Serial Redirection changes where the information is sent as it occurs This is a temporary setting and is removed when the server is reset You can use this menu option when the hard disk has run out of room to save the log data or if you want to see the log activity momentarily The menu choice Choose logfile serial redirection changes the default settings and is used after a server reset By changing the serial redirection to a serial port that has a printer attached you can produce a hard copy of the information You can still view the report on the console using the Show logfile menu option For server maintenance review and clear all logfiles on a weekly basis If entries have been made to the report since the last time it was displayed the System Status screen above the Main Menu shows a Y in the ERRORS field Note If you are unsure of the meaning or importance of any logfi
318. type of line card you are using The set of three identifiers module line card and port is called a triplet and is used in this format The default setting has all telephone lines on the server assigned to group 1 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 14 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 If you have more than one line in the group separate the line numbers by commas as you enter them on the worksheet For example write 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 since this is how you must enter them If you are entering a range of lines you must use the full triplet on both sides of the range such as 1 0 0 2 7 2 for everything on module 1 and everything on module 2 up to slot 7 port 2 You can omit the module number if it is module 1 for example 0 1 3 7 For each module line card and port s here are several valid values Table 2 2 describes them Table 2 2 Module Line Card and Port Values and Interpretations Valid Value Interpretation Module plank Module 1 number Specified module Line card All line cards controlled by the specified host number Specified line card Port i Al ports on the specified line card s number Specified port As Table 2 2 implies there are many possible combinations Table 2 3 shows several examples of valid module line card and port combinations and how the server interprets them Table 2 3 Module Line Card and Port Combin
319. uld give the users these passwords This effectively forces users to change their passwords when they log in Configuring FPSA Once you have activated FPSA you can configure it This involves the following steps e Establishing a user ID e Identifying the users by their real names e Establishing a password e Assigning permission categories e Setting up an audit trail if desired e Configuring password parameters Note Items followed by an asterisk are available to the system superuser before FPSA is activated Configuring is performed through the FPSA menu option of the Additional Options menu Deactivating FPSA You can deactivate FPSA only with the FPSA diskette at the server maintenance console For directions see the Task List in Volume 2 of this manual Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 145 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 EM 11 Billing This chapter describes the billing function and gives the requirements for configuring the billing function Billing reports are summarized in this chapter but the Reports chapter has more complete information about them Information covered in this chapter includes e Setting rates e Gathering billing data e Billing reports e Configuration requirements Overview The billing function collects statistics about NuPoint Messenger server usage and calculates charges for that usage You can set a low usage rate and a high usage rate for each s
320. umentation Release 7 0 time out If the line card does not detect answer supervision a ringing on the line by the number of seconds set in this exception the page is considered a failure This time out can be set between 0 and 255 seconds where 0 means no time out period is enforced wait forever Message Delivery Considerations This section covers specifics applicable only to message delivery Remember that you must set the Message Delivery parameter to Yes in the mailbox owner s mailbox configuration to enable message delivery Changing an FCOS Definition You must modify an existing FCOS or create a new one to give mailbox owners with message delivery control of their schedules and telephone numbers Feature bits listed in Table 4 4 control message delivery Change Weekday Weekend Schedule Message delivery users can set schedules for weekdays or weekends showing when they can be reached To change a message delivery schedule a user s mailbox must have an FCOS that includes feature bit 094 Enable message delivery change message delivery options To change a message delivery number a user s mailbox must have an FCOS that includes bit 143 Change message delivery phone number Both these feature bits require bit 070 User Options Menu to work Pager Re Queue The pager re queue functionality is activated by feature bit 168 for schedule one and bit 169 for schedule two If you have message delivery scheduled from
321. us for the area code The determination of whether to allow the call is based only on whether the prefix is allowed or disallowed in the NXX Table Screens the number with the NXX table Table 8 11 shows the screening method Allows the number or notifies the mailbox owner that the number is not within the mailbox owner s calling area Table 8 9 Exact Match Number Table Is the number in the If the table is to allow the If the table is to disallow table call the system the call the system Yes Allows the call Blocks the call No Blocks the call Allows the call Table 8 10 NPA Table Is the NPA in the table Yes If the table is to allow the call the system Checks for NXX table If no NXX table exists places the call copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation If the table is to disallow the call the system Blocks the call Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 No Blocks the call Checks NXX table If no NXX table exists places the call Table 8 11 NXX Table Is the NXX in the table _ If the table is to allow the If the table is to disallow call the system the call the system Yes Allows the Call Blocks the Call No Blocks the Call Allows the Call Screening Examples Several configuration examples are offered here to show how the RCOS works If you were to configure an RCOS as in Table 8 12 the system would process d
322. ust be installed before you can select one as a language for an LCOS For details about using Prompt sets within the application see chapters 2 and 7 For details about specific Prompts sets and their availability contact your support representative Figure 8 1 Sample LCOS Worksheet LCOS Parameter Descriptions This section describes all LCOS parameters by menu group copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 110 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Limits Parameters Includes parameters for basic mailbox functions and some optional features Greeting Length Sets the maximum time for recording a personal greeting When the user reaches this limit or the server detects silence the server stops recording and announces that the recording is complete If no limit is set the limit is the available storage capacity Enter Minutes from 0 0 through 60 0 0 prevents any greeting a period means no limit Default 2 0 minutes User Name Length Sets the maximum time for recording the mailbox name When the user reaches this limit or the server detects silence the server stops recording and announces that the recording is complete If no limit is set the limit is the available storage capacity This name is announced when the user makes or gives a message also used by NP Receptionist Enter Seconds from 0 to 240 4 minutes 0 means no limit Default 2 seconds Tips amp Techniques Set this t
323. utdial calls for paging message delivery and call placement Outdialing ports must be dedicated exclusively this means that there are fewer ports available to accept incoming calls If not enough ports are reserved to handle the outdial traffic however the requests are queued and users do not receive message waiting notification or messages in a timely manner In addition certain other types of message waiting indicators require the exclusive use of at least one server line card port Before assigning pagers or message delivery to mailboxes you should analyze call traffic flow and decide how much of the server you wish to devote to ouitdials Each call to a radio pager ties up an outdialing port for less than a minute queuing becomes a problem only when there are a great many users with pagers Message delivery can require more ports than paging since each port is tied up for the entire time that the user is logged in For example if a user does more than simply play the unplayed message s that activated message delivery the outdialing port can be in use for a considerable amount of time Call placement is more like message delivery because ports are in use for more time than for paging Note The server installation site as the calling party is responsible for any charges that accrue when paging message delivery or call placement calls are made to numbers outside of the PBX system Line Group Information All the server ports are assigne
324. utdials to certain area codes or to certain prefixes within an area code It can for example restrict outdials to area code 415 only or restrict area code 900 but allow outdials to anywhere else During creation or modification of a mailbox you must specify the RCOS for outdial restricting capabilities to be operational If no RCOS is specified in a mailbox s configuration outdials are not screened or restricted copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 125 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 RCOSs use NPA NXX screening to determine which area codes or exchanges to restrict The abbreviations NPA and NXX are industry terms for the three digit area code and the three digit prefix exchange within an area code respectively NPA NXX screening is easy for the system administrator to configure and is transparent to mailbox owners When a mailbox owner enters a telephone number for any type of outdial the system checks the number against the call screening set in the mailbox s RCOS If the telephone number is not restricted normal processing resumes If the telephone number is restricted the system responds I m sorry that telephone number is not within your calling area then cycles back to entering a telephone number RCOS and NPA NXX screening have these features e Outdial limits for message delivery automatic wakeup paging notification call placement and fax delivery e Multiple screening le
325. utorial NP Forms Voice forms question and answer mailboxes NP Net An optional feature used for digital networking a server NP Receptionist An optional feature that allows callers and users to reach extensions by keypad inputs This is the only application that can be assigned to a line group that already has another application configured NP TDD An optional feature for the server that furnishes English prompts for a TDD This functionality allows the hearing impaired to use NuPoint Voice software NPA A communications industry term for the area code of a DN NPA NXX screening A communications industry term for restricting telephone calls based on the area code and exchange See NPA NXX and RCOS NuPoint Voice application The basic software application for the server that provides voice messaging NuPoint Voice superuser When FPSA is activated persons have access to the Change Password option in the FPSA Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 205 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Menu and to all options in all other menus This classification is the second widest level of access NuPoint Voice tutorial See Standard tutorial NXX A communications industry term for the exchange prefix of a DN The exchange follows the area code and is a grouping of telephone numbers coming from the same CO Off system messaging See Call placement Optional feature A capability that is not
326. vailable and an ATB condition occurred on lines in the fax group The summary report is much less specific than the standard report but it allows you to easily determine the hours at which fax usage is at its peak You can use this report to reassign the fax groups based on any imbalances you might detect Complete Summary Report Also known as the Total Statistics Summary Report this report prints total statistics for a number of items such as message count speech blocks fax transactions and network usage The report is for the previous week in Sunday to Saturday order In the example given in Figure 12 14 the Friday data is for the day the report was run and the Saturday data is for six days previous April 15 Figure 12 14 Sample Complete Summary Report TOTAL STATISTICS SUMMARY REPORT Fri Apr 21 1995 12 26 pm lt SUNDAY gt Date Sun Apr 16 23 15 07 1995 Last Reset Sat Apr 15 08 52 55 1995 Total Messages 90000 Lowest Messages Free 86377 Total Speech 384000 Lowest Speech Free 325480 Total Calls 0 Total Seconds 0 00 00 Line ATB Count 0 Line ATB Seconds 0 00 00 Fax Trans 2 Fax Total Secs 0 00 02 Fax ATB Count 0 Fax ATB Seconds 0 00 00 Fax No Res Cnt 0 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 170 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 NETWORKING lt PEAKS gt lt TOTALS gt MESSAGE
327. vels including System screening of specific numbers NPA screening NXX exchange screening of up to 64 NPAs area codes Procedures You can perform the following procedures with RCOS These procedures are located in Volume 2 of this manual Procedure Number RCOS and NPA NXX Usage CP 3293 Assign an RCOS to a Mailbox CP 4335 Configure an RCOS CP 3295 Delete an RCOS CP 5406 Modify NPA NXX Tables CP 4334 Modify the Absorption Table CP 4332 Modify the Exact Match Table CP 4333 Set RCOS System Wide Parameters CP 5401 View RCOS Information CP 5404 The system capacity is 640 RCOSs Default RCOS You implement screening by creating a Restriction Class of Service RCOS and assigning it to the mailboxes The default RCOS is RCOS 1 it is unnamed and allows unrestricted outdial capabilities The RCOS 1 contents are summarized in Table 8 8 To implement NPA NXxX call screening you must modify RCOS 1 or configure another RCOS RCOS configuration involves setting both system wide parameters and RCOS specific parameters Table 8 8 Contents of Default RCOS 1 Parameter Value Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 126 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Starting digit position of NPAEnding digit position of NPA 00 Starting digit position of NXX 0 Ending digit position of NXX 0 Home NPA None Check do not check numbers without absorb digits Do not check Absorption digit p
328. ver greetings If conditional greetings are also enabled the user can select conditional server greetings that play in response to line conditions as shown in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Greetings Supplied by the Server Condition Greeting Ring No Answer lm sorry name does not answer Please leave your message at the tone Busy I m sorry name is on another call Please leave your message at the tone Call Forward lm sorry name is not available Please leave your message at the tone You can copy a mailbox greeting to a mailbox name and copy a mailbox name to a greeting Distribution Lists This section covers e How distribution lists are used in the server software e Interactions between distribution lists and various class of service settings e Distribution list administration Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 86 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Overview A distribution list allows a mailbox owner to send the same message to a number of recipients by entering the distribution list number instead of entering each mailbox number Mailbox owners can create distribution lists by phone or a server administrator can create them at the server maintenance console There are two types of distribution lists mailbox owner distribution lists sometimes called user distribution lists which are only accessible by the mailbox owner and master distributi
329. verified incorrect or orphaned copy lists found copy lists fixed copy list links fixed Sibling lists verified orphaned sibling lists found and deleted incorrect sibling lists found Sibling lists fixed message records verified errors found phoneline exceptions verified errors found erence counts saved Figure 12 20 Sample Online Speech Verify Report Verify Speech Prompt File System Utility Fri Jun 16 13 17 54 1995 ify virtual prompt drive 1 Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation is is is is is is 0 2 1 2 7 2 is 1 is 18 should be 19 should be 1 should be 1 should be 13 should be 1 should be 6 should be 1 should be 0 177 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Verifying master control sector Verifying prompt speech Summary of Prompt File System Status TOTAL USED FULL Number of Prompt Directory Sectors 002f 22 Number of Prompt Pointer Sectors 1770 0538 22 Number of Prompt Speech Blocks 3435 Oa4b 20 1336 prompt s verified 0 prompt s contained errors Verify virtual speech drive 5 Verifying master control sector Verifying transient speech Out of range block pointer count 0x00cd Summary of Speech File System Status TOTAL USED FULL Number of Transient Pointer Sectors 0ea6 0000 0 Number of Transient Speech Blocks 003e80 000000 0 0 transient message s verified 0 message s contai
330. ween an LCOS and FCOS When you assign an LCOS and FCOS to a mailbox be aware that certain options interact within and between these Classes of Service some options require the other options and some combinations of options conflict In particular the LCOS can affect how the FCOS functions For example if you allow a mailbox owner to make messages and the LCOS that has a user message length of 0 seconds the user cannot record a message Using the Worksheet Use an LCOS Worksheet Figure 8 1 to organize the information you need to create an LCOS and assign it to mailboxes Fill in the fields according to the information listed in LCOS Parameter Descriptions in this chapter Numbering an LCOS Assign a number from 1 to 640 for the new LCOS in Limits COS To conserve database space create LCOSs in blocks of 64 For example create 1 64 then 65 128 and so forth Naming an LCOS Assign a name to identify the LCOS up to 15 alphanumeric characters Setting Limits Assign a value to each parameter that you want to set and include in the LCOS For example to set the Message Count limit enter 30 in the Maximum number of messages box If a current value is acceptable write OK on the worksheet to indicate that you do not need to change that value Selecting the Prompts Languagethe default language for all line groups is American English Mnemonic Prompts other languages and Prompt sets are optional features that m
331. wing paragraphs Pre programmed default values are given where applicable If you want to use a default value indicate that fact on the worksheet Then you do not have to select or enter any information for that parameter during reconfiguration Many of the parameters on this worksheet are identical to those explained in the NuPoint Voice Application chapter The parameters that are the same are identified in the following sections and you can refer to the NuPoint Voice Application chapter for the information you need Defining a Line Group When you configure a line group you dedicate certain ports to a single application After you arrange line groups you set parameters for the entire group which eliminates the need to enter information for each individual port For example you can assign all ports for the DID NuPoint Voice application to a single line group then you can specify the dial plan dial strings etc for this entire group The server software recognizes line groups by their number Line Group Number Each line group is represented by a discrete number Valid line group numbers are 1 through 24 Group Name The group name though optional should identify the line group s purpose For example a line group could be called DID SYS There is no default group name Line s in Group You identify each line or port in a group the same as for the NuPoint Voice application For more information on identifying lines
332. x 3828 receipt 01 found for mailbox 3837 amis lists amis lists message records Sibling lists Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 176 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 annot find copy list for sibling 560100000003602 rslt 20 Verifying phoneline exceptions Verifying statistics data Compiling reference count statistics 502 2 2 rc_ stat ERROR Refcnt discrepancy for msg 359844 rc_stat Warning Refcnt discrepancy for msg 556336 rc stat Warning Refcnt discrepancy for msg 556371 rc_ stat Warning Refcnt discrepancy for msg 622013 rc_stat Warning Refcnt discrepancy for msg 687398 rc_stat Warning Refcnt discrepancy for msg 687405 rc_stat Warning Refcnt discrepancy for msg 1539530 rc_stat ERROR Refcnt discrepancy for msg 1670481 NuPoint Voice Record Summary mailboxes verified mailboxes contained errors mailboxes fixed 2 queue errors 2 errors found 394 Ref Ver 0 out of range queue head pointers 0 out of range queue tail pointers 0 bad or inconsistent queue links 0 double allocated queue links 2 messages referenced 8 errors found 0 out of range message numbers 0 inactive message references 0 truncated message references 0 mid message references 8 reference count discrepancies distribution lists verified distribution lists links verified errors found copy lists
333. x simply to notify them a message is in the main mailbox Incompatibility With Broadcast Message Feature A mailbox can either send its messages or its message waiting status to the mailbox in its distribution list 01 but not both This means the FCOS assigned to a mailbox cannot have both of these feature bits e 122 Define broadcast mailbox e 134 Broadcast message waiting only Combining Broadcast Mailbox Types In addition to being a standard mailbox a broadcast greeting name or passcode mailbox can also be a tree mailbox A broadcast greeting name or passcode mailbox can itself be a broadcast message mailbox that contains different broadcast lists for messages and greetings To have both messages and greetings broadcasted to the same list of recipients it is necessary to make distribution lists 01 and 09 identical List 01 controls the messages broadcasted to recipients and list 09 controls the greeting name or passcode broadcasted to recipients Limits Standard server limits on greeting and name length also restrict the broadcast greeting or name lengths for the sending mailbox limits for recipient mailboxes are ignored Greetings will not be broadcasted when modified through the console Greeting Copy Delete Menu at the server maintenance console Statistical or billing information is not available for broadcast greeting activity Non Delivery Receipts Non delivery receipts are deposited in the broadcast mailbox under
334. y N Example 2 Non DID Display Pager In this example John s pager allows display of numeric data so you can leave your phone number when you page him The phone number is displayed on the pager when John is paged The dial string for these actions is Caller Action Dial String Wait for dial tone T Copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 57 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 Dial 9 to get outside access 9 Wait for second dial tone T Dial pager company system number 18005552368 Wait two seconds for line to settle Wait for pager tone G Wait one second for pager tone to finish Dial individual pager number or PIN 458216 Wait for pager tone G Wait for pager tone to finish Dial display data 2374444 Enter to indicate end and make paging terminal hang up The dial string to accomplish the actions listed above is organized like this Pager system dial string T9T18005552368 G Pager number 458216G Post pager number 2374444 Other information needed for the Mailbox Worksheet is Pager frequency 4 Pager interval 10 Message delivery No Example 3 DID Display Pager Jane Jones has a DID display pager To access this pager manually you lift the telephone receiver wait for a dial tone dial 9 to get an outside line listen for a dial tone dial 1 213 555 9116 wait for a computer tone dial the display data 1 415 555 6644 then dial to tell the pager that
335. y a carrier for long distance outdials made from a mailbox For more information on billing features see the Billing chapter Applicable Outdial Types Outdial billing to an account or long distance carrier applies to e Pages e Message Delivery e Call placement e NuPoint Fax e NP WakeUp Any other type of outdial Any combination of these outdials can be billed or unbilled depending on how you set the following parameters in a mailbox configuration e Billed outdial index e Internal outdial index Unbilled outdial index e Access type For example you can have call placement outdials but not internal NuPoint Fax deliveries or paging calls billed to the originating mailboxes accounts Configuration Summary Configuring this feature involves copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 105 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentation Release 7 0 1 Configuring the access code that the outdial index represents in the Pager application 2 Establishing a minimum billed number length in the LCOS assigned to the originating mailbox 3 Setting these outdial billing parameters in the configuration of the originating mailbox Internal outdial index Billed outdial index Unbilled outdial index Billing number Billing dialing order Example Building on the example mentioned earlier suppose you want call placement outdials carried by common carriers and billed to the mailbox owner s co
336. ys for the report The report can be presented in one of two methods The Standard Group Usage displays the All Trunks Busy data for each line group in 15 minute increments for each hour of the chosen interval The Group Usage Summary Report shows a single value for each line group Figure 12 2 shows a Sample Standard Group Usage Report Figure 12 2 Sample Standard Group Usage Report LINE GROUP ATB 15min REPORT Thu Apr 20 1995 5 58 pm 04 17 95 8hr 17hr minutes interval Port Group 1 ESMDT DAY 01 HOUR 08 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL BUSY ATB_SEC 218 77 81 249 625 17 ATB_CNT 10 1 8 T3 32 DAY 01 HOUR 09 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL BUSY ATB_SEC 35 163 0 0 198 6 ATB_CNT 6 10 0 0 16 DAY 01 HOUR 10 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL BUSY ATB_SEC 44 13 0 0 51 2 ATB_CNT 4 2 0 0 6 DAY 01 HOUR 11 00 14 15 29 30 44 45 59 TOTAL BUSY ATB_SEC 5 0 14 0 19 1 ATB_CN 1 0 3 0 4 HIGHEST ATB_SEC 625 sec at 8 hr LOWEST ATB_SEC 0 sec at 12 13 14 15 16 hr Reading the Standard Group Usage Report The report heading shows the date and time that the report was run The first line of the report shows the date of the first statistic in the report and time interval during which the data was gathered Port Group The data displayed immediately below this entry refers to line group 1 copyright 2002 Mitel Networks Corporation 159 Mitel NuPoint Messenger Technical Documentati

Volume 1, Reference Information

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents